Panasonic WJ HD316 User Manual

Digital Disk Recorders

Operating Instructions

WJ-HD309/HD316

Model No.

MONITOR1

TIMER

ONITOR2

ALARM

ERROR

STOP

PLAY

SHIFT

PAUSE

REC-

ALARM

REC STOP

SUSPEND

SEQ

ALARM

RESET

OSD

PAN/TILT

GOTO

LAST

REV

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

PULL

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

COPY

FWD

TEXT

A-B

REPEAT

OPERATE

MARK

SETUP

/ESC

HDD

10/0

IRIS

HDD

LISTED

LOGOUT

PRESET

/AUTO

BUSY

SET

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD

316

Before attempting to connect or operate this product,

please read these instructions carefully and save this manual for future use.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1) Read these instructions.

2) Keep these instructions.

3) Heed all warnings.

4) Follow all instructions.

5) Do not use this apparatus near water.

6) Clean only with dry cloth.

7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

8) Do not use near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that

produce heat.

9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider

than the other. A grounding-type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are

provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the

obsolete outlet.

10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles and the points

where they exit from the apparatus.

11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.

12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a

cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-overs.

S3125A

13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.

14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way,

such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus

has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

CONTENTS

PREFACE

The Digital Disk Recorders WJ-HD316/309 are designed for

use within a surveillance system and are combination of a

hard disk recorder and a video multiplexer (16-input for WJ-

HD316, 9-input for WJ-HD309).

Digital hard disk recorder is the recording device using a

hard disk drive to record camera pictures instead of using

videotapes so that pictures recorded by repeated overwrit-

ing will not cause deterioration of recorded picture quality

anymore.

Up to 16 cameras can be connected to WJ-HD316 directly

(up to 9 cameras to WJ-HD309) and it is possible to record

their camera pictures. It is also possible to display four or

more camera pictures on a single monitor, to switch cam-

era pictures, and to operate cameras using this unit.

FEATURES

Various Recording Functions

Remote Operation via Network

• Multi-Recording

It is possible to operate this unit using a PC connected to a

LAN (Local Area Network) or the Internet by featured net-

work function.

It is possible to perform multiple recording using a sin-

gle digital disk recorder even if operating environments

are different, for example, recording pictures of cam-

eras in different places in different time.

Security Function and Reliability

• Scheduled recording

• Authentication function (registration of ID and pass-

word) restricts users available functions to be operated.

Up to 32 users can be registered.

It is possible to perform recording automatically at a

scheduled time on a designated day of a week.

Schedules can be set on each camera.

• If alteration of a recorded image data is made by any

reason, the alteration alert function notifies it.

• Emergency Recording

In case of emergency, emergency recording will be

given a higher priority than other recording modes by

operating an external switch.

• If a hard disk clashes, the backup function^*1, the mirror-

ing function^*2and the RAID 5 function^*3prevent from

data loss.

• External Timer Recording

It is possible to perform recording automatically using

an external timer.

^*1: Only when the recommended DVD-RAM drive, DVD-R

drive or CD-R drive is used

^*2: The mirroring function does not work with an external

hard disk drive such as an extension unit.

^*3: To use the RAID 5 function, an optional extension unit is

required.

• Event Recording

At an event occurrence such as when an alarm signal is

supplied, recording mode (quality and recording rate)

can be changed to high quality to record pictures.

• Motion Detection Function (VMD)

It is possible to start recording automatically when

motion is detected in a shooting area.

Transmission with Coaxial Cable, PS·Data and

RS485 Compatible

• It is possible to control a Panasonic’s combination cam-

era such as WV-CS850 using only a coaxial cable but

other devices. Using a coaxial cable also compensates

transmission loss.

• It is easy to establish the surveillance system by con-

necting PS·Data compatible system controller and

peripherals.

Frame Switcher Function

• It is possible to display pictures of four or more cam-

eras on a single monitor (multi-screen) splitting monitor

screen into 4, 7, 9, 10, 13, 16 using WJ-HD316, and into

4, 7, 9 using WJ-HD309.

While monitoring a multi-screen, each camera picture

will be displayed as moving image.

PRECAUTIONS

• Refer all work related to the installation of these

products to qualified service personnel or system

installers.

Replacement costs of the hard disk drives are not cov-

ered by the warranty even if it needs to be done within

the warranty period. Consult your dealer for servicing.

Set all the hard disk drives as master using the jumper

pin. Refer to the diagram attached on the HDD or the

operating instructions of the HDD for the jumper pin

assignment.

When a hard disk drive trouble occurred, replace it

immediately. Consult your dealer for servicing.

When replacing the hard disk drives, take notice that

the followings.

• Do not operate the appliances beyond their speci-

fied temperature, humidity, or power source ratings.

Use the appliance at temperatures within +5°C -

+45°C (41°F - 133°F) and humidity below 90 %.

The input power source for this appliance is 120 V AC

60 Hz.

• Handle the appliance with care.

Do not strike or shake, as this may damage the appli-

ance.

1. Do not detach the hard disk drives or the cables con-

necting between the unit and the front cover while the

HDD1/HDD2 indicators are lit or for around 30 seconds

after the indicators went off.

• Do not strike or give a strong shock to the unit.

It may cause damage or allow water to enter the unit.

2. Protect the hard disk drives from static electricity.

3. Do not stack them, nor keep them upright.

4. Do not use an electric screwdriver to fix them.

(Tightening torque: Approx. 0.49 N · m (5 kgf · cm))

Avoid the rapid change of the temperature/humidity to

prevent condensation. (Acceptable change: within

15°C/h (59 °F/h))

• Built-in backup battery

Before the first use, charge the built-in backup battery

by turning on the power for 48 hours or more.

If it is not charged enough, in the case where the power

goes down, the internal clock may keep bad time or the

operative condition may be different to that before the

electric power failure.

The built-in battery life is approximately 5 years. Ask the

shop where you purchased the unit when replacement

of the battery is required.

• Indication label

Refer to the indication label placed on the bottom of the

unit as to the indications of equipment classification

and power source, etc.

• Avoid placing receptacles that contain liquids such as

water near the unit.

• Cooling Fan

The cooling fan is perishable. It will need to be

replaced it after around 30 000 hours of operation.

Replacement costs of the cooling fan are not covered

by the warranty even if it needs to be done within the

warranty period. Consult your dealer for servicing.

If liquid falls over the unit, it may cause fire or electric

shock.

• Do not expose the unit to water or moisture, nor try to

operate it in wet areas.

• Cleaning

• Prevent condensation from forming on the surface of

the hard disk.

Wait until the dew evaporates in any of the following

cases.

Turn the power off when cleaning the unit. Otherwise it

may cause injuries.

Do not use strong or abrasive detergents when clean-

ing the appliance body.

The recorder is moved to a place significantly different

in temperature or humidity.

Use a dry cloth to clean the appliance when it is dirty.

When the dirt is hard to remove, use a mild detergent

and wipe gently.

The recorder is moved out of an air-conditioned room.

The recorder is placed in an extremely humid place.

The recorder is placed in a room where a heater has

just been turned on.

• Built-in hard disk drives

Hard disk drives are vulnerable to vibration. Handle

them with care.

It is possible to damage them if they are moved while

their motors are still running. Do not move them just

after turning the power of them on or off (around 30

seconds).

• We recommend that you make a note of your settings

and save them. This will help you when required to

change the system configuration, or when unexpected

trouble or failure occurs.

Hard disk drives are perishable. It will need to be

replaced it after around 30 000 hours of operation in

case they are used at temperature of 25 °C (77 °F).

TRADEMARKS AND REGISTERED TRADEMARKS

• Adobe, Adobe logos, and Acrobat are registered trade-

marks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S. and/

or other countries.

• Operating Instructions (book, these operating instruc-

tions)

• Network Operating Instructions (pdf)

• Network Setup Instructions (pdf)

• Microsoft, Windows and Windows XP are registered

trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or

other countries.

These "Operating Instructions" contains descriptions of how

to operate this unit with the buttons on the front panel.

Refer to the "Network Operating Instructions" on the provid-

ed CD-ROM for descriptions of how to operate this unit

from a PC.

Refer to the "Network Setup Instructions" on the provided

CD-ROM for descriptions of how to perform the required

settings and how to connect to other devices.

Adobe^®Acrobat^®Reader is required to read these operat-

ing instructions (pdf) on the provided CD-ROM. When the

Adobe Acrobat Reader is not installed on the PC, download

the latest Adobe Acrobat Reader from the Adobe web site

and install it.

• Other names of companies and products contained in

these operating instructions may be trademarks or reg-

istered trademarks of their respective owners.

• Distributing, copying, disassembling, reverse compil-

ing, reverse engineering, and also exporting in violation

of export laws of the software provided with this prod-

uct, is expressly prohibited.

About These Operating Instructions

There are 3 operating instructions for WJ-HD316/WJ-HD309

as follows.

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

IN NO EVENT SHALL MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC INDUSTRI-

AL CO., LTD. BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY OR ANY PER-

SON, EXCEPT FOR REPLACEMENT OR REASONABLE

MAINTENANCE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR THE CASES,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BELOW:

(2) PERSONAL INJURY OR ANY DAMAGE CAUSED BY

INAPPROPRIATE USE OR NEGLIGENT OPERATION

OF THE USER;

(3) UNAUTHORIZED DISASSEMBLE, REPAIR OR MODIFI-

CATION OF THE PRODUCT BY THE USER;

(4) ANY PROBLEM, CONSEQUENTIAL INCONVENIENCE,

OR LOSS OR DAMAGE, ARISING OUT OF THE SYS-

TEM COMBINED BY THE DEVICES OF THIRD PARTY.

(1) ANY DAMAGE AND LOSS, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIM-

ITATION, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSE-

QUENTIAL OR EXEMPLARY, ARISING OUT OF OR

RELATING TO THE PRODUCT;

MAJOR OPERATING CONTROLS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS

ꢀꢀFront View

!! ! !

! @

qw er yu i

@ @

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

PULL

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

TIMER

S-VIDEO

GOTO

LAST

ERROR

ALARM

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

VIDEO

COPY

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

OUT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

ALARM

REPEAT

–

SUSPEND

ALARM

RESET

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

LOGOUT

[WJ-HD316]

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

AUDIO

OUT

HDD

PRESET

/AUTO

OPERATE

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD

HDD

SET

BUSY

!! @ @

@ @

!! ! !

! @

qw er yu i

@ @

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

PULL

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

TIMER

S-VIDEO

GOTO

LAST

ERROR

ALARM

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

OSD

VIDEO

COPY

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

OUT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

ALARM

REPEAT

–

SUSPEND

ALARM

RESET

[WJ-HD309]

COPY

MARK

LOGOUT

IRIS

LISTED

AUDIO

OUT

HDD

PRESET

/AUTO

OPERATE

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD

HDD

SET

BUSY

!! @ @

@ @

q Operate Indicator (OPERATE)

Lights up when the power is turned on.

u HDD Access Indicators (HDD1/HDD2)

Blinks when the HDD1 or the HDD2 is accessed

respectively.

w Alarm Suspension Indicator (ALARM SUSPEND)

Lights up when the alarm suspension mode is selected.

i Monitor Switch button (MONITOR1/MONITOR2)

Pressing this button switches the monitor. This button

lights up when the monitor 1 is selected, and goes off

when the monitor 2 or the VGA monitor is selected.

e Alarm Indicator (ALARM)

Blinks when an alarm occurs, and lights steadily when

the activated alarm is reset automatically.

To turn this indicator off, press the ALARM RESET but-

ton.

o Shift Button (SHIFT)

Toggles the functions of the camera selection buttons.

r Alarm Reset Button (ALARM RESET)

Pressing this button cancels alarm activation, and

returns the system to the condition before the alarm

was activated.

! Camera Selection Buttons ([1] - [10/0], [11] - [16] for

WJ-HD316, [1] - [9], [0] for WJ-HD309)

Pressing a button displays live or playback image of the

selected camera. The LED in the button indicates the

status as follows.

t Error indicator (ERROR)

Green: When a button is lit green, the currently dis-

played image on the monitor is live from a respec-

tive camera.

Blinks orange when an error that will not be an obstacle

to keep on running this unit occurs.

Blinks red when an error that is possible to cause the

system down occurs.

Orange: When a button is lit orange, the image from a

respective camera is recorded.

Blue: When a button is lit blue, the currently displayed

image on the monitor is live from a respective cam-

era and also is recorded.

y Timer Indicator (TIMER)

Lights up when the scheduled recording is set, and

blinks while the scheduled recording is being per-

formed.

When the shift button is lit, these buttons work as the

toggled function buttons.

(The buttons available as the toggled function buttons

will light green when the shift button is lit.)

@ Set Button (SET)

Works differently depending on situations as below:

• Plays recorded images in the current playback speed

when this button is pressed during fast playback.

• Registers preset positions of cameras.

• Activates the auto focus function.

! Pan, Tilt, Latest Recorded Image Playback Button

(PAN/TILT, GO TO LAST)

• Sets the alarm suspension mode on/off.

• Determines setting parameters on the setup menus.

Pans/tilts a selected camera, or playbacks the latest

recorded image.

(Refer to page XX and XX respectively.)

@ Jog Dial

Works differently depending on situations as follows:

• Plays recorded images frame by frame when this dial is

rotated during pausing playback.

! Zoom, Focus, A - B Repeat Button (ZOOM/FOCUS,

A-B REPEAT)

Zooms in/out, adjusts focus, or repeats playback

recorded images between designated two points.

(Refer to page XX and XX respectively.)

• Skips playback time when this dial is rotated during

playback at normal speed.

• Moves the cursor on the searching menu or the thumb-

nail menu.

! Iris, Listing Button (IRIS, LISTED)

• Selects a setting parameter or a character on the setup

menus.

Adjusts iris, or enables/disables the filtering playback.

(Refer to page XX and XX respectively.)

@ Shuttle Ring

! Preset, Auto Button (PRESET/AUTO)

Moves a camera to the preset position, or activates

auto pan operation.

Works differently depending on situations as follows:

• Plays fast when this dial is rotated during playback at

normal speed.

(Refer to page XX and XX respectively.)

• Turns the searching menu pages or the thumbnail

menu pages.

! Stop Button (STOP)

Stops playback.

Connectors Cover

Play/Pause Button (PLAY/PAUSE)

Plays recorded images, or pauses playback.

Copy Port (COPY2)

Connect a recommended DVD-RAM drive, CD-R drive

or DVD-R drive with this port.

Record Button (REC/REC STOP)

Starts recording. To stop recording, press this button

down for 2 seconds or more.

@ S-Video Output Connector (S-VIDEO)

Connect the S-video input connector of a VCR with this

connector. The same video signal supplied to the MON-

ITOR OUT2 connector on the rear panel will be sup-

plied to this connector.

! Slow Button (SLOW)

Pans/tilts a selected camera slowly.

! Search Button (SEARCH)

@ Video Output Connector (VIDEO OUT)

Connect the video input connector of a VCR with this

connector. The same video signal supplied to the MON-

ITOR OUT2 connector on the rear panel will be sup-

plied to this connector.

Displays the searching menu.

@ Setup, Escape Button (SETUP/ESC)

Displays the setup menu, or cancels operation on the

setup menus, etc.

# Audio Output Connector (AUDIO OUT)

This connector, for an RCA standard jack, supplies an

unbalanced –10 dBV, 600 Ω line output audio signal to

an external device.

@ Busy Indicator (BUSY)

Lights when a selected camera is not available to oper-

ate because other user is operating using a controller

or a PC via network. In this case, wait until this indicator

goes off.

Recorded audio will be supplied from this connector

during playback.

The same audio signal supplied to the AUDIO OUT

connector on the rear panel will be supplied to this con-

nector.

@ Arrow Buttons (A B C D )

Adjusts zooming/focus, or moves the cursor on the

setup menus and the searching menu.

ꢀꢀRear View

o !

q w

t y ui

! !

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

[WJ-HD316]

OUT

VIDEO

o !

q w

t y ui

! !

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

[WJ-HD309]

OUT

VIDEO

q Audio Input Connectors (AUDIO IN 1 - 4)

t Monitor Output Connector (MONITOR OUT1, MONI-

TOR OUT2/CASCADE OUT)

These connectors, for RCA pin jacks, accept an unbal-

anced –10 dBV, 10 kΩ line input audio signal supplied

from an external device such as a microphone amplifi-

er.

Connect monitors to these BNC connectors.

The MONITOR OUT2 connector can also be used as

the CASCADE OUT connector.

When using two or more units of WJ-HD316/WJ-HD309

and use the MONITOR OUT2 connector as the CAS-

CADE OUT connector, connect with the CASCADE IN

connector of another WJ-HD316/WJ-HD309.

w Audio Output Connector (AUDIO OUT)

This connector, for an RCA standard jack, supplies an

unbalanced –10 dBV, 600 Ω line output audio signal to

an external device.

Recorded audio will be supplied from this connector

during playback.

y Cascade In Connector (CASCADE IN)

Connect with the CASCADE OUT connector of another

WJ-HD316/WJ-HD309 when using two or more units of

WJ-HD316.

e Video Input Connectors (CAMERA IN 1 - 16 for WJ-

HD316/CAMERA IN 1 - 9 for WJ-HD309)

Connect system cameras or combination cameras to

these BNC connectors.

u Serial Connector (SERIAL)

Connect a PC with this D-Sub 9-pin connector when

controlling this unit.

A 75 Ω termination is made unless the video output ter-

minal is connected.

To connect combination cameras, connect them to the

CAMERA IN 1 - 8 connectors of the WJ-HD316, or the

CAMERA IN 1 - 6 of the WJ-HD309 (accept connection

with coaxial cables).

i Monitor Connector (MONITOR (VGA))

Connect a VGA monitor with this connector. The same

video signal supplied to the MONITOR OUT2 connector

will be supplied to this connector.

r Video Output Connectors (CAMERA OUT 1 - 16 for

WJ-HD316/CAMERA OUT 1 - 9 for WJ-HD309)

These BNC connectors supply video signals looped

through the video input connectors.

o Alarm Connector (ALARM)

Connect an external device such as a sensor or a door

switch with this D-SubD-Sub 25-pin connector.

Note: Video signals will not be supplied from the CAM-

ERA OUT 1 - 6 connectors of the WJ-HD309 if the

power of the WJ-HD309 is off.

! Alarm/Control Connector (ALARM/CONTROL)

Connect a control switch with this D-Sub 25-pin con-

nector when controlling this unit using an external

device, or when controlling an alarm device such as a

buzzer or a lamp.

! PS·Data Ports (DATA)

ꢀꢀOn the Monitor 1 (To display

Connect PS·Data compatible devices with these ports.

only live image)

! Mode Switches (MODE)

Set the operation mode of this unit with these dip

switches.

! RS485 Ports (RS485 (CAMERA))

Connect RS485 compatible combination cameras with

these ports.

! Network Port (10/100BASE-T)

Connect this unit to a network compatible with 10BASE-

T or 100BASE-Tx when controlling this unit using a PC

via network.

! Copy Port (COPY1)

1. Camera Title

Connect a recommended DVD-RAM drive, CD-R drive

or DVD-R drive with this port.

Displays the edited camera title.

A position to display a camera title can be selected

from the following.

Extra Storage Port (EXT STORAGE)

Connect an optional extension unit (WJ-HDE300) with

this port.

Upper left, upper right, lower left, lower right, center

The default camera title position is lower right (R-

LOWER).

Power Switch (POWER)

2. Time

Turns the power of this unit on and off.

Displays the current time (hour:minute:second) and

date (year:month:day).

! Signal Ground Terminal (SIGNAL GND)

A position to display the time can be selected from the

following.

! Power Cord Inlet (AC IN)

Center, upper left, lower left, upper right, lower right

The default time display position is lower left (L-

LOWER).

Connect the power cord to this inlet.

Note: When the camera title and the time display are

layered in a multi-screen display, only the time dis-

play will be displayed.

3. Alarm Display

When an alarm occurred, an alarm display will be dis-

played.

The alarm display will be displayed differently as fol-

lows depending on which alarm has occurred.

VMD-*: When motion is detected.

LOSS-*: When video loss occurred.

COM-#: When a command alarm occurred.

TRM-#: When a terminal alarm occurred.

*: Camera number (1 - 16 for WJ-HD316, 1 - 9 for WJ-

HD309)

#: Event number

Note: Refer to page XX for further information about

event types and event actions.

Style2

ꢀꢀOn the Monitor 2 (To display live

Displays the statuses on all of the main bar, the left bar

and the right bar.

or recorded image)

w – A

Style3

Displays the statuses only on the main bar, and not dis-

play information on the left bar and the right bar.

Note: Style2 and Style3 are graphic images. They may

be displayed not so clear as style1.

Note: The same image will be displayed on the monitor 2

and the VGA monitor.

Important

Since VGA output from this unit is the same as for televi-

sions (720 H x 480 V pixels/vertical frequency of 59.94 Hz),

it may be possible that both the left and right edges can not

be fit in the screen depending on a VGA monitor.

1. Camera Title

Displays the edited camera title.

A position to display a camera title can be selected

from the following.

Upper left, upper right, lower left, lower right, center

The default camera title position is lower right (R-

LOWER).

2. Task Bar

Displays the current statuses.

The task bar consists of the main bar (w - A), the left

bar (w - B), and the right bar (w - C).

There are 3 different ways to display the task bar as fol-

lows.

Style1

Displays only the main bar and the statuses is dis-

played on it.

ꢀꢀStatuses on the Task Bar

• On the Main Bar

q Status Display Area

e Live/Playback Time Display Area

t Error Display Area

w Copy/Delete Icons

r Alarm Display Area

q Status Display Area

Indicated Item

Live

Status

Indication

Indicates live image display status

: Live image is displayed

: Live images are displayed

sequentially

Playback

Indicates that playback is being performed currently

with displayed playback speed

5: Playing currently

4: Playing reversely currently

h: Pausing currently

: Playing at fast speed currently

: Playing reversely at fast speed

currently

Recording

Indicates that recording is being performed currently

Indicates that searching is being performed currently

: Recording currently

: Searching currently

w Copy/Delete Icons

Indicated Item

Copy

Status

Indication

Indicates that data copy is being performed currently

: Copying currently

Delete

Indicates that data deletion is being peformed cur-

rently

: Deleting data currently

e Live/Playback Time Display Area

Indicated Item

Status

Indication

Time

Displays time of the displayed image

When displaying live image: Current time

When playing recorded image: Time when

recorded

Year:Month:Day

Hour:Minute:Second

*: During the summer time, an asterisk (*) will be

displayed on the left side of the displayed time.

r Alarm Display Area

Indicated Item

Alarm

Status

Indication

Indicates that an alarm has occurred

VMD-*: When motion is detected

LOSS-*: When video loss occurred

COM-*: When a command alarm occurred

TRM-*: When a terminal alarm occurred

Alarm type

*: Camera number (1 - 16 for WJ-HD316, 1 - 9 for WJ-

HD309)

#: Alarm number

Alarm is occurring currently

Note: Refer to page XX for further information about alarm types and alarm operations.

t Error Display Area

Indicated Item

Status

Indication

Error Warning

Indicates an error occurrence or warning

ALT-*: Alteration is detected

R-ERROR: Failed to read data from the HDD

W-ERROR: Failed to write data on the HDD

SMART: Warning of the HDD malfunction

H-METER: Set time for hour-meter (active time of

the HDD) warning has passed

Error type

THERMAL: The temperature inside the unit is too

high

Error is occurring currently

POWER:The power outage is detected

#-nn%: Warning about running out of disk space

with displaying available disk space percent-

age

#-FULL: No available disk space

MEDIUM-n: An error occurred in an external

recording device

REMOVE: The hard disk is removed from the sys-

tem automatically because of an access error

FAN: The fan is faulty

Abbreviation of partition

Status

Displayed

abbreviation

Normal recording area

Event recording area

Copy area

NML

EVT

CPY

External recording device

connected to the COPY1 port

on the rear panel

CP1

CP2

*: Camera number (1 - 16 for WJ-HD316, 1 - 9 for

WJ-HD309)

#: Abbreviation that indicates partition

nn: Available disk size

External recording device

connected to the COPY2 port

on the front panel

n: Number of connector an external recording

device is connected

Note: Refer to page XX for further information about error types and what to do when error occurred.

• On the Left Bar

Indicated Item

Status

Indication

Camera

Indicates recording and displaying status

Gray: Camera currently not displayed or not con-

nected to a respective channel

Green: Camera displayed on the monitor

Orange: Camera currently being recorded

Blue: Camera currently being recorded and dis-

played on the monitor

Camera 1 is on the top and camera

16 is on the bottom

• On the Right Bar

Indicated Item

Status

Indication

Used disk space

Indicates that available disk space of each partition.

Top: 100% of the disk space is used (no avail-

able disk space)

Second from the top: 80% of the disk space is

used

Center: 60% of the disk space is used

Second from the bottom: 40% of the disk space

is used

Normal Recording Area

Event Recording Area

Bottom: 20% of the disk space is used

Note: When "CONTINUE" is selected on the

"Termination" page of the "Maintenance" setup

menu, available disk space will not be displayed.

Refer to a system administrator for further infor-

mation.

NML: Available disk space of normal recording

area used for manual recording and sched-

uled recording

EVT: Available disk space of event recording

area used for event recording and emergency

recording

STARTUP

z Insert the power plug to an outlet

c Enter a user name and password.

(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)

Note: Make sure the power source is AC 120 V, 60 Hz.

x Turn the power switch on the rear

panel on.

The OPERATE indicator will light and the system check

(checking the system and hard disk) will start.

The startup splash image below will be displayed on the

monitor 2 and the VGA monitor during the system check.

Rotate the jog dial to select a character to be entered in the

cursor position.

It is also possible to enter numbers by pressing the camera

selection buttons ([1] - [10/0] for WJ-HD316, [1] - [9], [0] for

WJ-HD309).

To move the cursor, press the arrow buttons.

It is the same way to enter characters as the way to edit

characters attached to images. Refer to page XX for further

information.

When the auto login is off, the login window will be dis-

played if any button on the front panel of this unit is pressed

after the system check. (Go to step 3)

When the auto login is on, live image will be displayed after

the system check.

v Display live image.

Press the SET button to display live image.

If the authentication window is displayed, enter user name

and password.

When authenticated, live image will be displayed.

When not authenticated, the authentication window will be

displayed again.

Notes:

• If the hard disk configuration had been changed after

the last startup or the hard disk has problems, the disk

configuration menu page will be displayed automatical-

ly after the startup splash. (Refer to page XX for further

information.)

• It is possible to display the disk configuration menu by

pressing the SET button when the image below that

says the system check has been completed is dis-

played.

Important

When using the optional extension unit (WJ-HDE300), turn

the power of this unit after turning on the power of all exten-

sion units.

CLOCK ADJUSTMENT

It is recommended to check the clock periodically and put

the clock right if it shows the wrong time.

Adjust the clock when displaying live image.

c Move the cursor to "Time & Date"

using the arrows button (C D).

The "Time & Date" menu will be displayed.

z m

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

Basic Setup

User Setup Save

User Setup Load

ꢀ

SAVE

Load

GOTO

LAST

Time

Date

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

User Regist.

User Edit

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

x c b v n

z Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2

v Press the SET button.

seconds or more.

S ET U P

EN U

メンテナンス

スイッチャ

録

表

画

示

イベント動作スケジュール

システム

The SETUP MENU will be displayed on the monitor 2 and

the VGA monitor.

LIV E

通

信

ＭＭＭ/ＤＤ/ＹＹ

基本設定

■日付表示形式

ＯＦＦ

■時刻表示形式

JU N

日付時刻設定

ユーザー登録

ユーザー修正

ユーザー削除

ホスト登録

適用

ＭＡＳＴＥＲ

■自動時刻合わせ

　・ＭＡＳＴＥＲ動作時刻

■サマータイム

SET UP MENU Maintenance Recording

Switcher Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

ＡＵＴＯ

設定へ

LIVE

■サマータイム切り替え設定

ホスト修正

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate Status

Disk Info.

ホスト削除

CAM

1ips

レベル設定

Version Info.

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

セーブ・ロード

Maintenance

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

Event Log

Error Log

SUPER FINE

FINE

Access Log

NORMAL

EXTENDED

b Move the cursor to "Time Format"

using the arrows button and set the

time (Month, Day, Year, Time) using

the jog dial.

x Move the cursor to "System" using

the arrows button (D C A B ) and

press the SET button.

n Move the cursor to "SET" and press

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

the SET button.

LIVE

Basic Setup

Host IP Address

0. 0. 0. 0

DELETE

ꢀ

The selected date format and the set time will be applied.

Time

Date Setup

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

m Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2

seconds or more.

The SETUP MENU will disappear and live image will be dis-

played.

SHUTDOWN

To shutdown the unit, do the followings.

1. In case recording is being performed, press the REC

button for 2 or more seconds. Recording will stop and

the indicator on the REC button will go off.

2. In case playback is being performed, press the STOP

button. Playback will stop and the indicator on the

PLAY/PAUSE button will go off.

3. Turn the power of the unit off using the POWER switch

on the rear panel. The OPERATE indicator will go off.

Important

• Detach the plug from the outlet if not operating the unit

for a length of time.

• In case the unit has not been operated for a certain

period, turn on the power of the unit between whiles to

prevent interference with functions.

RECORDING (Manual Recording)

Do the followings to recordmanually.

Refer to a system administrator about the required settings

for manual recording.

When recording with higher priority than manual recording

is performed, manual recording will not be performed until

this recording finishes.

Refer to the following about the recording mode.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

GOTO

LAST

x Stop recording.

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

Press the REC button down for around 2 seconds.

The indicator on the button will go off and recording will

stop.

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

Notes:

• A camera selection button will light orange (currently

being recording) or blue (currently being recorded and

displayed on the monitor) to indicate which camera is

being recorded.

z Start recording.

Press the REC button to start recording.

• When recording with other recording mode is being

performed, the indicator on the REC button will not go

off even though the REC button is pressed to stop man-

ual recording.

The indicator on the button will light and recording will start.

Images from all the connected cameras will be recorded

with the default setting.

It is possible to record only images displayed on the moni-

tor 2 and the VGA monitor by changing the setting.

ꢀꢀRecording Mode and Priority

There are 4 recording modes as follows.

Recording Mode

Emergency Recording

Event Recording

Manual Recording

Scheduled Recording

Description

Start recording manually using an external switch at an emergency event occurrence

Recording will be performed automatically at an event occurrence

Start and stop recording manually

Priority*1

2^*2

3^*2

4^*2

Recording will be performed with a designated start/stop time and date automatically

*1: Priorities on the above table are the default settings. (Emergency recording is the highest priority.)

*2: Priorities for manual recording, scheduled recording and event recording can be changed. Refer to a system administrator

about the settings.

ꢀꢀRecording Time

Approximate possible recording durations will be as follows (with built-in HDD, manual recording):

Recording with audio

Unit: Hour

EXA

NQA

(Standard)

1 730

570

FQA

(High Quality)

1 320

440

SFA

Recording Rate

(For Long Time Recording)

(Highest Quality)

2 040

680

1 270

680

1 070

470

950

570

630

440

7.5

350

510

400

200

430

340

170

330

260

130

260

210

100

Recording without audio

Unit: Hour

EXA

NQA

(Standard)

2 860

950

FQA

(High Quality)

1 900

630

SFA

Recording Rate

(For Long Time Recording)

(Highest Quality)

3 810

1 270

950

760

380

120

1 430

470

350

280

140

950

710

570

280

630

470

380

190

7.5

Important

The possible recording durations on the above tables are approximate durations under the conditions below. Refer to a system

administrator for further information.

• Recording on the built-in hard disk (160 GB x 2)

• Recording all camera channels by manual recording

• "AUTO" is selected for the recording rate

RECORDING (Emergency Recording)

Record manually using an external switch at an emergency

event occurrence.

For example, install an external switch at the reception

counter, and start recording using it when a suspicious

individual appears.

• When starting emergency recording during other

recording with different recording mode is being per-

formed, the indicator on the REC button will keep on

being lit and other recording will be resumed after the

emergency recording finished.

Refer to a system administrator about the required settings

for emergency recording.

ꢀꢀRecording duration of emergency

recording

Recording duration of emergency recording can be set as

follows. Refer to a system administrator for further informa-

tion.

Parameter

Recording Duration

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

GOTO

LAST

1 s - 10 s

Record for the selected time (1 - 10 sec-

onds , can be set in 1 second step)

Record for 20 seconds

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

20 s

30 s

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

Record for 30 seconds

SET

BUSY

1 m - 10 m

Record for the selected time (1 -10 min-

utes can be set in 1 minute step)

Record for the selected time (20 - 60 min-

utes, can be set in 10 minutes step)

Record only while the external switch is

being pressed down

20 m - 60 m

MANUAL

z Press the external switch.

The indicator on the REC button will light and recording will

start.

With the default setting, recording will be performed for 10

seconds.

CONTINUE

Record until the ALARM RESET button is

pressed

Emergency recording is the highest priority. Emergency

recording will be performed even when this unit is record-

ing in other recording mode.

x Stop recording.

When recording duration set in advance had passed,

recording will stop automatically.

With the default setting, recording will be stop automatically

after recording for 10 seconds.

When "CONTINUE" is selected for "Recording Time" of

"Emergency REC" on the SETUP MENU (Recording), press

the ALARM RESET button to stop recording.

The indicator on the REC button will go off and recording

will stop.

Important

• A camera selection button will light orange (currently

being recording) or blue (currently being recorded and

displayed on the monitor) to indicate which camera is

being recorded.

PLAYBACK

It is possible to play recorded image without stopping

recording.

x Start playback.

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will light and

recorded image of the selected camera will be played.

Playback image will be displayed on the monitor 2 and the

VGA monitor.

First playback after login: The latest recorded image will

be played.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

With the default setting, playback will start 5 seconds

before the start time of the latest recorded image. Start

time can be selected from the following:

5 s before/10 s before/30 s before/1 m before/5 m

before

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

Refer to a system administrator about the settings.

Other than those above: Playback will start from the end

z Select a camera respective to

point of the recorded image played last time.

recorded images to be played. (Go to

step 2 if not necessary)

c Stop playback.

Press a desired camera selection button.

The pressed camera selection button will light green and

respective live image will be displayed.

Press the STOP button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and

playback will be stopped.

Live image will be displayed on the monitor 2 and the VGA

monitor.

ꢀꢀAvailable functions during playback

Pause

Pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button to pause playback. While pausing,

the indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will blink.

PLAY

PAUSE

Pressing this button again will resume playback.

Single frame skip

Rotating the jog dial during pause will skip to the next or previous

frame.

REV

FWD

Rotating the jog dial clockwise will skip to the next frame and rotating

it counterclockwise will skip to the previous frame.

–

Fast forward/Fast reverse

Rotating the shuttle ring will change the playback speed (1/2x, 1x, 2x,

5x, 10x, 20x) according to rotated degree. When the shuttle ring is

held in the 20x position (rotated to the end) for 10 seconds, the play-

back speed will be 50x. When the shuttle ring is held 5 more seconds

after the playback speed became 50x, the playback speed will be

100x.

REV

FWD

–

Rotating the shuttle ring clockwise will play at fast speed and rotating

it counterclockwise will play reversely at fast speed.

To play at normal speed, release the shuttle ring.

Hold playback speed

Press the SET button while holding the rotated shuttle ring to hold a

desired playback speed. (Playback speed will be held even though

the shuttle ring is released.)

REV

FWD

–

To return to the normal playback speed, press the SET button.

SET

Skip

Rotating the jog dial during playback will skip to the next or previous

recorded image.

Rotating the jog dial clockwise will skip to the next recorded image

and rotating it counterclockwise will skip to the previous one.

If there is no next or previous recorded image, current playback will

be continued.

Play the latest recorded image

Multi-screen display

Press the GO TO LAST button to play the latest recorded image.

It is possible to display recorded images in multi-screen

(4/7/9/10/13/16 for WJ-HD316, 4/7/9 for WJ-HD306).

q Press the SHIFT button. The SHIFT indicator will light.

w Press a camera selection button (1 - 6 for WJ-HD316, 1 - 3 for WJ-

HD306) to select a desired multi-screen.

Camera selection button 1: 4 split screen

Camera selection button 2: 7 split screen

Camera selection button 3: 9 split screen

Camera selection button 4: 16 split screen (Only for WJ-HD316)

Camera selection button 5: 10 split screen (Only for WJ-HD316)

Camera selection button 6: 13 split screen (Only for WJ-HD316)

e To display recorded image on a single screen, press the SHIFT

button again.

After the SHIFT indicator went off, press a camera selection but-

ton.

Marking

It is possible to play from a marked point. Do the followings to mark a

desired point.

1. Press the SHIFT button. The SHIFT indicator will light.

2. Press the camera selection button 12 (9 for WJ-HD309) (MARK) at

a desired point to be marked during playback.

Up to 100 points can be marked.

When marked while displaying multi-screen, same number of split

screen will be counted as marked point. (When a point is marked

while displaying 16 split screen, 16 points will be marked simulta-

neously.)

Text display

It is possible to display text information attached to recorded image

while playback.

Text display is available only when playing on a single screen.

q Pause playback.

w Press the SHIFT button. The SHIFT indicator will light.

e Press the camera selection button 11 (5 for WJ-HD309) (TEXT).

A - B repeat playback

It is possible to play recorded images between two designated points

repeatedly.

q Designate a start point (A) by pressing the A - B REPEAT button

during playback.

The A - B REPEAT indicator will start blinking, and the time of point

A will be displayed.

Time of point A

To cancel the designated point, press the SETUP/ESC button.

w Designate an end point (B) by pressing the A - B REPEAT button

during playback.

Playback between point A and B will start and keep on playing

repeatedly.

The time of point A and B will be displayed during playback.

Time of point A and B

e Press the A - B REPEAT button during A - B repeat playback to

return to normal playback.

Playback Image on a Designated Disk

Images from a camera will be recorded on the built-in hard

disk or external recording devices (DVD-RAM drive, DVD-R

drive or CD-R drive) connected with this unit.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

Available disk space or disks are as follows.

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

Note: External recording devices can be used as copy

area of images recorded on the hard disk. It is impossi-

ble to record images on the external recording devices

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

directly.

BUSY

HDD Normal Recording Area/Event Recording Area:

Disk space for recording on the built-in hard disk

Recorded image by manual recording (refer to page

XX) or event recording (refer to page XX) will be stored

in this area.

z Press the SHIFT button.

The SHIFT indicator will light.

HDD Copy Area: Disk space for recording on the built-in

hard disk

Recorded images willbe copied in this area (refer to

page XX).

x Press the camera selection button 9

(7 for WJ-HD309) (DISK SELECT).

The DISK SELECTION window will be displayed on the

monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

Built-in hard disk

ディスク選択

Recording area for

manual recording and

normal schedule

recording

●H D D 通常領域／イベント領域

●H D D コピー領域

●C O P Y 1

Normal recording area

Recording area for

event recording and

●C O P Y 2

emergency recording

Event recording area

O K

キャンセル

Recording area for

copying

c Move the cursor to select a disk to

be played using the arrow buttons

and rotate the jog dial to check the

radio button next to the selected

disk. Press the SET button to

determine the selection.

Copy area

Notes:

• Playback image will be displayed only on the monitor 2

and the VGA monitor.

• Playback can be performed during recording.

• Disk space size of each recording area differs depend-

ing on the settings.

The COPY DATA window will be displayed when "HDD

Copy Area" is selected.

The RECORDING EVENT LIST window will be displayed

when "HDD Normal/Event Recording Area" is selected.

(Refer to page XX for further information.)

Refer to a system administrator for further information.

To close the DISK SELECTION window, move the cursor to

select "CANCEL" and press the SET button.

v Rotate the jog dial to select a desired

recorded image to be played, and

press the SET button to determine

the selection.

b Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to

play the selected recorded image.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE

button will light and the playback will

start.

n To stop playback, press the STOP

button. The indicator on the

PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and

the playback will stop.

Live image will be displayed on the monitor 2 and the VGA

monitor.

Notes:

• When "HDD Normal Recording Area/Event Recording

Area" is selected, pressing the PLAY/PAUSE button

after stopping playback will start playback from the end

point of the recorded image played last time.

• When "HDD Copy Area" is selected, pressing the

PLAY/PAUSE button after stopping playback will start

playback the latest image copied on the selected disk.

Playback From a Designated Time and Date

It is possible to play recorded image from a designated

time and date without stopping recording.

Playback image will be displayed on the monitor 2 and the

VGA monitor.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

z Press the SEARCH button

repeatedly until the time and date

designation window is displayed.

The time and date designation window will be displayed on

the monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

x Enter the start time using the jog dial

and the arrows button.

Select time and date using the jog dial. To move the cursor,

use the arrows button (A B ).

c Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will light and start

playback from the entered time and date.

If there is no recorded image of the entered time:

When there are images recorded after the entered time, the

oldest recorded image after the entered time will be played.

When there is no image recorded after the entered time, the

newest recorded image before the entered time will be

played.

v Press the STOP button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and

stop playback.

Live image will be displayed on the monitor 2 and the VGA

monitor.

SEARCH AND PLAY

There are 3 ways to search recorded image and play it.

• Search a recording event and play it (Recording event search)

• Search a motion detected time and date from recorded images and play it (VMD search)

• Search marked point and play it (Marking search)

Note: Playback image will be displayed on a single screen on the monitor 2 and the VGA monitor. To play in a multi-screen,

switch to a multi-screen after starting playback.

ꢀꢀSearching Recording Event and Playback (Recording Event Search)

Display a list or a thumbnail of recording events, and select a desired recording event among them to play it.

It is possible to search using the following filters:

Searching Filters

TIME & DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

Search only images recorded in the entered time range.

Search only recorded images from the selected camera channel.

Search only images recorded in the selected recording mode.

It is possible to search images recorded in the following recording mode:

EMERGENCY: Emergency recording (Refer to page XX.)

VMD:

TERMINAL:

Event recording performed when motion had been detected (Refer to page XX.)

Event recording performed when terminal alarm had been detected.

COMMAND: Event recording performed when command alarm had been detected.

VIDEO LOSS: Event recording performed when video loss had occurred.

MANUAL:

Manual recording (Refer to page XX.)

SCHEDULE: Scheduled recording (Refer to page XX.)

Search only images recorded with text information

TEXT

ꢀꢀRecording Event List Window

Searching filter buttons

Filter cancel button

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

Recording event

Text information

Camera Channel

Time and date

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP

APR.25.03*2:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM

TOTAL

12345

Time range of listed data

Number of listed data

Searching information

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

Searching filter buttons:

Filter cancel button:

Time and date:

Selects the searching filter

Cancels the selected searching filter and lists all recording events

Time when recording started will be displayed.

Time when motion had been detected will be displayed.

Time when the point is marked will be displayed.

Camera channel of the recorded image will be displayed. The recorded image of the

displayed camera channel will be played on a single screen.

Recording mode will be displayed.

First several characters of text information will be displayed if the image has text infor-

mation.

Camera channel:

Recording event:

Text information:

Time range of the listed data:

Number of the listed data:

Searching information:

Time range of the listed data will be displayed.

Number of the listed data will be displayed.

Searching filter will be displayed. (A filter of currently displayed list will be displayed in

orange.)

ꢀꢀRecording Event Thumbnail Window

Time and date

Camera channel/Recording event

Number of listed data

Time and date:

Time when recording started will be displayed.

Time when motion had been detected will be displayed.

Time when the point is marked will be displayed.

Camera channel/Recording event: Camera channel of the recorded image will be displayed. The recorded image of the

displayed camera channel will be played on a single screen. Recording mode also will

be displayed.

Number of the listed data:

Number of the listed data will be displayed.

x Use the arrows button (A B ) to

select a searching filter (TIME &

DATE, CAMERA, EVENT, TEXT), and

press the SET button.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

z z

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP

z Press the SEARCH button

repeatedly until the recording event

list window is displayed.

APR.25.03*2:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM

TOTAL

12345

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

When a searching filter is selected, the respective search-

ing filter window will be displayed.

Select "UNLOCK FILTER" and press the SET button to can-

cel the selected filter.

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP

Refer to page XX about the searching filters.

APR.25.03*2:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM

TOTAL

12345

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

The recording event list window will be displayed on the

monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

Use the arrows button (D C ) to switch displaying the list

window and the thumbnail window alternately.

To search using a searching filter, go to step 4.

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP

APR.25.03*2:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM

TOTAL

12345

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

03.APR.25

12:34:56 AM

03.APR.25

12:34:56 AM

12ch. MANUAL

TOTAL

12345

Move the cursor to select the recording event (refer to page

xx) using the arrows button (D C ) and rotate the jog dial to

ON.

Press the SET button to determine the selection.

The recording event of the selected filter will be listed.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

Filter recording events by text information

BUSY

TEXT FILTERING

WITHOUT TEXT

c Filter recording events.

Filter recording events by time and date

SET : [ SET ]

CANCEL : [ ESC ]

ꢀꢀ

Rotate the jog dial to select OFF, WITH TEXT or WITHOUT

TEXT.

Press the SET button to determine the selection.

The recording event filtered by the selected filter will be list-

ed.

Move the cursor using the arrows button and rotate the jog

dial to enter time and date.

Press the SET button to determine the entered time and

date.

v Rotate the jog dial to select a

recording event to be played.

The recording event in the entered time range will be listed

and displayed.

TIME&DATE

CAMERA

REC EVENT

TEXT

UNLOCK FILTER

TEXT

TIME&DATE

CAM REC EVT

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch MANUAL ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP

Filter recording events by camera channel

CAMERA FILTERING

CAMERA

APR.25.03*2:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM

TOTAL

12345

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

b Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

SET : [ SET ]

CANCEL : [ ESC ]

The LISTED indicator and the indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE

button will light and playback of the selected recording

event will start.

Select camera channel numbers (1 - 16 for WJ-HD316, 1 -

9 for WJ-HD309) by pressing the camera selection buttons

to apply filtering.

The selected camera channels will be highlighted (white).

Press the SET button to determine the selection of camera

channel numbers.

Note: When the LISTED indicator is lit, only listed recording

events are available to be played. Press the LISTED

button during playback to make all recording events

available to be played.

The recording event of the selected camera channels will

be listed.

n To stop playback, press the STOP

Filter recording events by recording event

button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and

playback will be stopped.

REC EVENT FILTERING

EMERGENCY OFF

VMD

Live image will be displayed on the monitor 2 and the VGA

monitor.

TERMINAL

COMMAND

VIDEO LOSS

MANUAL

OFF

SCHEDULE

SET : [ SET ]

CANCEL : [ ESC ]

VMD SEARCH

TIME&DATE

ꢀꢀSearching a motion detected

time and date from recorded

images and play it (VMD search)

Search a motion detected time and date from all images

recorded in all the recording modes, and display a list or a

thumbnail of the results.

CAM

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch

APR.25.03*2:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM

TOTAL

12345

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

Select a time and date displayed on the result list or thumb-

nail to play it.

It is possible to filter by camera channel, time and date,

detection area or searching mode, to list time and date of

events that recorded when motion had been detected.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

03.APR.25

IRIS

LISTED

12:34:56 AM

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

03.APR.25

12:34:56 AM

12ch. MANUAL

TOTAL

12345

z Press the SEARCH button

repeatedly until the VMD search list

is displayed.

x Press the SET button.

VMD SEARCH

TIME&DATE

CAM

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch

ꢀꢀ

APR.25.03*2:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM

TOTAL

12345

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

The result list of the VMD search will be displayed on the

monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

(The list in the displayed window is the results of the previ-

ous search.)

Use the arrows button (D C ) to switch displaying the list

window and the thumbnail window alternately.

The VMD search window will be displayed.

Enter a camera channel number and time range on the

VMD search window for the VMD search.

To search by the same conditions as the previous search,

press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

Go to the step 12 when the VMD search is performed and a

list of the results is displayed after the PLAY/PAUSE button

is pressed.

Note: It is possible to set all displayed area as motion

detection area by pressing the SET button after select-

ing "ALL AREA".

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

n Move the cross cursor using the

arrows button to a point to be

determined as the start point of

motion detection area.

c b

c Move the cursor using the arrows

button and rotate the jog dial to

enter a camera channel number and

time range for the VMD search.

ꢀꢀ

Press the SET button to determine the selected point as the

start point of the motion detection area.

⁄ 4 ⁄ 1⁄ 3

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

v Press the SET button.

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

⁄ 0

⁄ 1 , ⁄ 0⁄ 2

m Move the cross cursor using the

arrows button to a point to be

determined as the end point of the

motion detection area.

The motion detection area setup window will be displayed.

To search by the same conditions as the previous search,

press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

Go to the step 12 when the VMD search is performed and a

list of the results is displayed after the PLAY/PAUSE button

is pressed.

b Rotate the jog dial to select "SETUP

AREA " on the status bar.

Press the SET button to determine the selected point as the

end point of the motion detection area.

It is possible to set up to 4 motion detection areas by

repeating step 6 and 7.

, Rotate the jog dial to select "EXIT"

on the status bar to exit from the

motion detection area setup window.

Move the cursor to an area for the settings of VECTOR

using the arrows button [B ] and rotate the jog dial to select

an area. Move the cursor to the parameter box of the

selected area using the arrows button [B ] to select an

interval time for an object moving between each area from

the following.

--/5 s/10 s/20 s/30 s/40 s/50 s/1 m

Move the cursor to a parameter box of each area using the

arrows button [B ] and rotate the jog dial to select a moving

duration for an object in each area from the following.

--/5 s/10 s/20 s/30 s/40 s/50 s/1 m

Refer to page 28 for further information about the detection

modes.

. Press the SET button to display the

VMD search window. Refer to page

xx for further information about each

of the detection mode.

⁄ 1Press the SET button or the

PLAY/PAUSE button to start

searching and display the result of

the VMD search.

VMD SEARCH

ꢀꢀ

ANY AREA

•

MASKING DURATION

24H

VECTOR

VMD SEARCH

•

TIME&DATE

CAM

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch

DURATION

SET : [SET] SEARCH : [PLAY] CANCEL : [ESC]

APR.25.03*2:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM

TOTAL

12345

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

⁄ 0Move the cursor to select a detection

mode using the arrow buttons and

rotate the jog dial to check the radio

button next to the selected detection

mode. Press the SET button to

determine the selection.

⁄ 2Rotate the jog dial to select a result

to be displayed.

VMD SEARCH

TIME&DATE

CAM

APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM 01ch

VMD SEARCH

ꢀꢀ

ANY AREA

•

MASKING DURATION

24H

VECTOR

•

APR.25.03*2:34:56 AM APR.25.03*12:34:56 AM

TOTAL

12345

TIME&DATE SEARCH REC EVENT SEARCH VMD SEARCH MARK

DURATION

SET : [SET] SEARCH : [PLAY] CANCEL : [ESC]

⁄ 3Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to

Refer to page XX for further information about each of the

detection mode.

start playback.

The LISTED indicator and the indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE

button will light and playback of the selected recording will

start.

Note: It is possible to skip the playback point to the listed

time (motion detected time) by rotating the jog dial

when the LISTED indicator is lit.

Move the cursor to the parameter box using the arrows but-

ton [B ] to select a masking duration from the following.

1S/1M/1H/24H

To return to the normal playback, press the LISTED but-

ton.

Motion is detected in area D within 10 seconds after being

detected in area C.

When all of the above have occurred, an event action will

be performed.

⁄ 4Press the STOP button to stop

playback.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and

playback will be stopped.

Live image will be displayed on the monitor 2 and the VGA

monitor.

It will be subject to be listed if an object keeps on moving

for the set period in the detection area. For example, in

case of the following settings; 10 sec. for areas A and B, 20

sec. for area C and 30 sec. for area D:

An event action will be performed when an object keeps on

moving more than the set period in the specified detection

area.

ꢀꢀDetection Mode

Set how to detect motion in the set motion detection area.

There are 3 detection modes as follows:

Important

It is impossible to set two or more detection modes simulta-

neously.

It will be subject to be listed if "motion" is detected in any of

the set motion detection areas.

Any motion will be detected anywhere in the A, B, C, D

areas.

Note: In the ANY AREA mode, it is possible set the mask-

ing duration. When the masking duration is set, motion

will be ignored for a certain period (set duration as the

masking duration) in the same area. It will be conve-

nient to set the masking duration to make the subject

period shorter in case that it is required to search from

the long time range or searching results are too many.

It will be subject to be listed if an object moves within the

set time to the other detection areas in the set order.

The following is an example.

10 S

Motion is detected in area B within 10 seconds after being

detected in area A.

Motion is detected in area C within 20 seconds after being

detected in area B.

ꢀꢀSearching a marked point and

play from that point (Marking

search)

Display the recording time of recorded images with a

marked point in a list or a thumbnail and select the desired

recording time to play. Refer to page XX for further informa-

tion about marking.

03.APR.25

12:34:56 AM

v c z

03.APR.25

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

12:34:56 AM

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

12ch. MANUAL

TOTAL

12345

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

To delete all displayed marking list, press the camera

selection buttons [1] and [2] simultaneously for 2 seconds

or more when displaying the marking list window.

D 1

D 2

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

x Rotate the jog dial to select a desired

marked time.

z Press the SEARCH button

repeatedly until the marking list

window is displayed.

c Press the PLAY/PAUSE button.

The LISTED indicator and the indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE

button will light, and playback a recorded image from the

selected marked time will start.

Notes:

• It is possible to skip the playback point to the listed time

(marked time) by rotating the jog dial when the LISTED

indicator is lit.

To return to the normal playback, press the LISTED but-

ton.

• It is possible some recorded images with marked point

may have been deleted by overwrite recording or the

deleting function.

The result list of the marking search will be displayed on the

monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

Use the arrows button (D C ) to switch displaying the list

window and the thumbnail window alternately.

v Press the STOP button.

The indicator on the PLAY/PAUSE button will go off and

playback will be stopped.

Live image will be displayed on the monitor 2 and the VGA

monitor.

MONITOR LIVE IMAGES

It is possible to display live images on a single screen or a

multi-screen.

ꢀꢀElectronic Zoom

When displaying on a single screen, zooming of the dis-

played image is possible.

on a singleSequential display (displaying images from cam-

eras will be switched automatically is also available.

Electrical zoom is available only on the selected monitor.

When the MONITOR1/MONITOR2 indicator is lit (the moni-

tor 1 is selected), electronic zoom works only on the moni-

tor 1.

ꢀꢀDisplaying Live Images on a

Single Screen

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REV

FWD

REPEAT

–

GOTO

LAST

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

PAN/TILT

IRIS

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

LISTED

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

10/0

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

–

DISK SELECT

COPY

TEXT

MARK

SET

BUSY

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

EL-ZOOM

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

z Press the SHIFT button when

z Press the MONITOR1/MONITOR2

monitoring live image on a single

screen.

button to select the monitor.

When the monitor 1 is selected, the indicator will light.

When the monitor 2 or the VGA monitor is selected, the indi-

cator will not light.

The SHIFT indicator will light.

x Press the EL-ZOOM button to

x Press a camera selection button (1 -

16 for WJ-HD316, 1 - 9 for WJ-HD

309) to select a camera.

enlarge the displayed image.

The displayed image will be displayed with x2 zoomed

size.

Zooming portion will change each time the EL-ZOOM but-

ton is pressed.

x2 – x4 - OFF

Live image from the selected camera will be displayed and

the respective camera selection button will light green or

blue.

When the monitor 2 is selected, live image will be displayed

on the VGA monitor.

Notes:

• When image is zoomed (x2 or x4), it is possible to move

the zoomed image using the arrows button.

• When any indicator of PAN/TILT, ZOOM/FOCUS, IRIS,

PRESET/AUTO is lit, it is impossible to use the EL-

ZOOM function.

When displaying on a 9 split screen

ꢀꢀDisplaying on a Multi-screen

It is possible to display images on a multi-screen (4, 7, 9,

Each time the camera selection button 9 is pressed, dis-

played camera channels will be changed as follows:

Only for WJ-HD316: 1-9 CH – 10-16 CH

10, 13, 16 for WJ-HD316, 4, 7, 9 for WJ-HD306).

z Press the MONITOR1/MONITOR2

button to select the monitor.

ꢀꢀSequential Display

When the monitor 1 is selected, the indicator will light.

When the monitor 2 is selected, the indicator will not light.

Displayed images from cameras will be switched automati-

cally.

Camera images will be displayed sequentially according to

the settings performed in advance.

x Press the SHIFT button.

z c

The SHIFT indicator will light.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

c Press a camera selection button 1 - 6

(1 - 3 for WJ-HD306) to select a

desired multi-screen.

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

Camera selection button 1: 4 split screen

Camera selection button 2: 7 split screen

Camera selection button 3: 9 split screen

Camera selection button 4: 16 split screen (Only for WJ-

HD316)

z Press the MONITOR1/MONITOR2

Camera selection button 5: 10 split screen (Only for WJ-

HD316)

button to select the monitor.

Camera selection button 6: 13 split screen (Only for WJ-

HD316)

When the monitor 1 is selected, the indicator will light.

When the monitor 2 is selected, the indicator will not light.

The camera selection buttons respective to live images dis-

played on a multi-screen will light green or blue.

x Press the SHIFT button.

The SHIFT indicator will light.

c Press the SEQ button.

The camera selection button respective to displayed image

will light green.

To stop sequential display, press the SEQ button.

When trying to display on a single screen or multi-screen

during the sequential display, sequential display will be

stopped.

When the monitor 2 is selected in step 1, sequential display

will also start on the VGA monitor.

When the monitor 2 is selected in step 1, live images will be

also displayed on the selected multi-screen on the VGA

monitor.

To display on a single screen

Press the SHIFT button. The SHIFT indicator will go off.

Press any of camera selection buttons.

Live image will be displayed on a single screen.

When displaying on a 4 split screen

Each time the camera selection button 4 is pressed, dis-

played camera channels will be changed as follows:

WJ-HD316: 1-4 CH – 5-8 CH – 9-12 CH – 13-16 CH

WJ-HD306: 1-4 CH – 5-8 CH – 9 CH

CONTROL CAMERAS

When displaying live images, the following camera controls

are possible.

ꢀꢀZoom

Zooms in/out on images. Depending on models of the con-

nected cameras, the image size for the respective zooming

portion may be different. For further information, refer to the

operating instruction for the camera.

• Panning/tilting: Moves a camera horizontally/vertically.

• Zooming:

• Focus:

Zooms in/out images.

Adjusts the focus.

• Iris:

• Preset action:

Adjusts the iris of the lens.

Moves a camera to the preset position

registered in advance.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

• Auto pan:

Pans a camera automatically from the

start point to the end point registered

in advance.

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

Notes:

BUSY

• Controlling cameras is possible only when displaying

images on a single screen.

• Depending on models of the connected cameras, it

may be impossible to control the camera or some func-

tions may be not available.

• Refer to page xx for descriptions of how to display and

perform the settings with the settings menu of the cam-

era from this unit.

z Press the ZOOM/FOCUS button.

The ZOOM/FOCUS indicator will light.

x Use the arrows button (D C ) to

zoom the displayed image.

ꢀꢀPanning/Tilting

Moves a camera horizontally/vertically.

Press the arrows button downward (D ) to zoom out and

upward (C ) to zoom in.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

ꢀꢀFocus

Adjusts the focus. The auto focus function is available.

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

z Press the PAN/TILT button.

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

The PAN/TILT indicator will light.

x Use the arrows button to adjust

vertical or horizontal position.

z Press the FOCUS button.

Camera will move slowly by pressing the arrows button

while holding the SLOW button down.

The ZOOM/FOCUS indicator will light.

x Use the arrows button (A B ) to

adjust the focus.

Auto focus is available by pressing the SET button.

ꢀꢀIris

ꢀꢀPreset Action

Adjusts the iris of the lens.

Moves a camera to the preset position registered in

advance.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

Important

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

GOTO

LAST

When using WV-CS650 or WV-CS600A, register preset

positions using the settings menu of the camera.

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

ꢀꢀRegister Preset Positions of Cameras

Up to 64 preset positions can be registered.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

z Press the IRIS button.

REV

FWD

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

The IRIS indicator will light.

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

x Use the arrows button (A B ) to

adjust the iris.

x v

To reset the set iris, press the SET button.

z Press the PAN/TILT button and move

the camera to a desired position to

be registered as a preset position.

[2] Press the SET button.The preset

registration window will be

displayed.

PRESET REGISTRATION

PRESET NUMBER

CANCEL

c Press a camera selection button (1 -

10/0 for WJ-HD316, 1 - 9, 0 for WJ-

HD309) to register a preset position

number.

Pressed button number will be registered as a preset posi-

tion number.

The jog dial also can be used to select a preset position

number by rotating it.

Up to 64 can be registered as a preset position number.

Note: To move the camera to another registered preset

position, press the SET button after selecting a desired

preset position number in step 2. The PRESET/AUTO

PAN window will not close and it is possible to select

another preset number continuously.

v Select "OK" using the arrows button

and press the SET button.

The adjusted camera position (currently displayed on the

monitor) will be registered as a preset position with the

selected preset position number.

To cancel the selected preset position, select "CANCEL"

using the arrows button and press the SET button. The set-

ting will be canceled and the preset registration window will

be closed.

ꢀꢀAuto Panning

Pans a camera automatically from the start point to the end

point registered in advance.

ꢀꢀMove a camera to the preset

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

position

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

LOGOUT

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

SET

REV

FWD

BUSY

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

z Press the PRESET/AUTO button.

The PRESET/AUTO indicator will light and the PRESET/

AUTO PAN window will be displayed.

z Press the PRESET/AUTO button.

x Move the cursor to "AUTO PAN"

using the arrows button and check

the radio button next to "AUTO PAN"

using the jog dial.

The PRESET/AUTO indicator will light and the PRESET/

AUTO PAN window will be displayed.

x Press a camera selection button (1 -

10/0 for WJ-HD316, 1 - 9, 0 for WJ-

HD309) to select a desired preset

position.

PRESET / AUTO PAN

PRESET

Preset Number

AUTO PAN

The jog dial also can be used to select a preset position

number by rotating it.

CANCEL

PRESET / AUTO PAN

PRESET

Preset Number

AUTO PAN

c Select "OK" using the arrows button

and press the SET button.

The PRESET/AUTO PAN window will be closed and auto

panning will start.

CANCEL

During auto panning, it is impossible to register preset posi-

tion. To cancel the auto panning, select "CANCEL" using

the arrows button and press the SET button. The setting will

be canceled and the PRESET/AUTO PAN window will be

closed.

c Select "OK" using the arrows button

and press the SET button.

The PRESET/AUTO PAN window will be closed and the

camera will move to the selected preset position.

When selecting "CANCEL" using the arrows button and

press the SET button, the PRESET/AUTO PAN window will

be closed.

ABOUT THE EVENT FUNCTION

The event action will be performed when the following

events occur.

ꢀ Activity Detection Mode (ADM)

This mode records images in the place where an event

occurred without notifying outside.

• Terminal alarm: When a signal is supplied from an

external device such as a door sensor to the ALARM

terminal, this is stated as an event of the terminal alarm.

• Motion detection: When motion is detected by the

motion detection function (see below), this is stated as

an event of the motion detection.

• Video Loss: When a video signal supply is stopped

because of a cable disconnection or malfunction of a

camera, this is stated as an event of the video loss.

• Command alarm: When a command alarm is supplied

from a PC connected to the SERIAL connector on the

rear panel of this unit, this is stated as an event of the

command alarm.

Activity Detection

Event Action

Start recording

Alarm Mode

Mode

Displays event information

on the monitor.

ꢀ

Blinks the alarm indicator.

Sounds the buzzer.

Switches the displayed

image to the image from a

location of an alarm occur-

rence.

ꢀ

About the Motion Detection Function (VMD)

An alarm signal will be supplied when motion (luminance

transition) is detected in a designated area. It is possible to

save images recorded in the place where motion is detect-

ed, or send e-mails when motion is detected.

Move a camera to the preset

position.

Notifies an event occurrence

by sending e-mails.

ꢀ

Refer to a system administrator for further information about

the required settings for the motion detection function such

as the settings of the detection area.

Notifies an event occurrence

by the PS·DATA/RS232C

commands.

ꢀ

Supplies a signal from the

ALARM connector or the

ALARM/CONTROL connec-

tor on the rear panel of this

unit (Alarm signal output).

ꢀ

ꢀ Action at an event occurrence

The event action will be performed according to the set-

Record the event log.

tings when an event occurs.

b : Applicable ꢀ : Not applicable

There are 2 event action modes for the alarm mode (ALM)

and the activity mode (ADM) for each event type. The event

action will be different according to the set event action

mode.

When an event of the alarm mode (ALM) occurs, this unit

activates the alarm action.

About the event action mode

ꢀ Alarm Mode (ALM)

This mode notifies an event occurrence outside. Action

taken in the alarm mode is referred as the alarm action.

ꢀꢀDisplays the event information in the alarm

display area on the monitor 1 and the cam-

era title display area on the monitor 2

ꢀꢀAlarm Function

ꢀꢀBlinks the ALARM indicator on the front

panel

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

TIMER

ERROR

ALARM

SHIFT

SEQ

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

TEXT

COPY

ALARM

SUSPEND

ALARM

RESET

HDD 1

HDD 2

OPERATE

ꢀꢀSwitches the displayed images on the moni-

tor 1 and the monitor 2 to the images from a

location of an alarm occurrence (on a single

screen)

ꢀꢀSounds the buzzer

Contact to a system administrator about sounding duration.

ꢀꢀNotifies an event occurrence to the con-

nected system device (Alarm Output)

Sends

signal to the device connected to the

ALARM/CONTROL connector, and the connected device

such as a buzzer will be activated.

ꢀꢀStarts recording automatically

Starts recording the image from a location of an event

occurrence automatically.

ꢀꢀMoves a camera to the preset position

A camera will move to the preset position registered in

advance.

ꢀꢀNotifies an event occurrence by sending e-

mails

E-mails will be sent to addresses registered in advance.

Refer to the Network Operating Instructions (pdf) on the

provided CD-ROM.

ꢀꢀCancel the Alarm Action

ꢀꢀSuspend the Alarm Actions

When an alarm occurred, this unit will start the alarm action

It is possible to suspend (deactivate temporarily) the alarm

according to the selected alarm action mode.

actions even when an event occurred.

To cancel the alarm action, press the ALARM RESET but-

ton.

When "ON" is selected for "Alarm Auto Reset" (on the "Alarm

Setup" menu of "Event"), the followings will be performed

automatically even if the alarm action is not canceled by

pressing the ALARM RESET button on the front panel.

This function will be useful when required not to activate the

alarm actions for a certain period, such as when configur-

ing the system. However, images and event log will be

recorded even when alarm actions are suspended.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

TIMER

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

ERROR

• The ALARM indicator will stop blinking and light steadi-

• The displayed alarm information will disappear

• The buzzer will stop beeping

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

ALARM

RESET

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

HDD 1

HDD 2

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

z x

STOP

PLA

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

TIMER

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

ERROR

ALARM

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

ALARM

SUSPEND

REPEAT

ALARM

RESET

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

ꢀꢀTo suspend (deactivate temporarily)

HDD 1

PRESET

/AUTO

OPERATE

LOGOUT

HDD 2

BUSY

the alarm actions

z Press both the ALARM RESET

button and the SET button at the

same time.

The ALARM SUSPEND indicator will light.

z Press the ALARM RESET button to

cancel the alarm actions.

The ALARM indicator will go off.

ꢀꢀTo stop suspending the alarm

actions

x Press both the ALARM RESET

button and the SET button at the

same time again.

The ALARM SUSPEND indicator will go off.

Note: When an external switch is connected to the

ALARM/CONTROL connector on the rear panel, it is

possible to suspend the alarm actions using the exter-

nal switch.

In this case, the alarm actions will be suspended when

the external switch is on.

To stop suspending the alarm actions, set the external

switch to off.

COPYING (Duplicate)

It is available to copy (duplicate) manually the recorded

images in the copy area of the built-in hard disk to the

external recording device (DVD-RAM disk, DVD-R disk,

CD-R disk) connected to the unit.

x Press the COPY button.

DATA COPY

CAMERA

It is recommended to make back-up copies on a regular

basis for unexpected situations such as malfunction of the

hard disk.

CAMERA

2003

2005

Manual copy is available during the following.

• While displaying of live images

• While pausing playback of recorded images

• When displaying a searching window (Recording event

list window, VMD search list window, Marking list win-

dow)

COPY DRIVE

HDD COPY AREA

COPY 1

COPY 2

CANCEL

The DATA COPY window will be displayed on the monitor 2

and the VGA monitor.

(Manual copy is not available when a thumbnail window

is displayed.)

The DATA COPY window will not be displayed when a

thumbnail window is displayed.

Notes:

In this case, display a list window using the arrows button

(D C ).

• The auto copy function is available for copying record-

ed images automatically. When the auto copy function

is enabled, manual copy is not available. Refer to a sys-

tem administrator for further information about the auto

copy function.

• To copy during playback of recorded images, pause

playback temporarily.

• To copy recorded images on the DVD-RAM disk, for-

matting (initializing) the DVD-RAM disk is required in

advance. Refer to page xx for the descriptions of how

to format DVD-RAM disks.

c Perform the settings for data copy

(camera channel, time range, a disk

on which images is to be copied).

Move the cursor to each setting item

using the arrows button and select a

parameter rotating the jog dial.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

v Select "OK" button using the arrows

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

button and press the SET button.

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

The DATA COPY window will be closed and data copy will

start.

SET

BUSY

The copy icon will be displayed on the task bar during

copying.

c v

To close the DATA COPY window, select "CANCEL" using

the arrows button and press the SET button. The setting will

be canceled and the DATA COPY window will be closed.

z Press the SHIFT button.

The SHIFT indicator will light.

To copy recorded image during playback, pause the play-

back temporarily.

When the selected COPY DRIVE is not found, copying will

not start and the DATA COPY window will not be closed

even when the SET button is pressed after selecting "OK".

PRESET REGISTRATION

Copy is canceled

DISK MANAGEMENT

Perform the settings for the built-in hard disk of the unit, of

the extension unit and the DVD-RAM disk. These are the

descriptions of how to delete recorded images on the hard

disk and how to format a DVD-RAM disk.

x Move the cursor to "Maintenance"

using the arrows button (D C A B )

and press the SET button.

Refer to a system administrator for further information about

the other disks.

c Move the cursor to "Data Delete"

ꢀꢀDeletion of recorded images

using the arrows button (D C ).

saved on the hard disk manually

The "Data Delete" menu will be displayed.

Delete recorded images saved in the normal area or the

event area of the hard disk manually.

S ET U P

EN U

メンテナンス

スイッチャ

録

表

画

示

イベント動作スケジュール

システム

LIV E

通

信

By setting a time and date, images in the normal record

area of the hard disk recorded before the set time and date

will be deleted.

It is recommended to delete manually when available disk

space is running out.

■ＨＤＤ自動消去

■通常録画領域手動消去

　　　　 2 0 0 3 　年 1 1

録画レート一覧

ディスク情報

バージョン情報

終端設定

月

2 2 日以前消去

消去実行

■イベント録画領域手動消去

　　　　 2 0 0 3 　年 1 1

月

2 2 日以前消去

残容量警告

データ消去

■ＤＶＤフォーマット

　・ＣＯＰＹ1

実行

ディスクメンテナンス

　・ＣＯＰＹ2

イベント入力ログ

障害ログ

アクセスログ

Important

It is impossible to recover the deleted images.

Note: It is possible to delete recorded images automatically

when the set days have passed from the day the image

was recorded (Auto Delete). Refer to a system adminis-

trator for further information.

v Press the SET button.

The cursor will be displayed on the "Data Delete" menu.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Auto Delete

ꢀꢀ

z m

REC Rate Status

Disk Info.

OFF

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

ꢀꢀ

Delete before JAN

DELETE

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Version Info.

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

ꢀꢀ

Disc Format of DVD

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

Delete before JAN

DELETE

REV

FWD

ꢀꢀ

GOTO

LAST

COPY1

PAN/TILT

FORMAT

COPY2

Maintenance

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

Event Log

Error Log

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

Access Log

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

x c n v n

b Move the cursor to "Manual Delete

for Normal Recording Area" or

"Manual Delete for Event Recording

Area" using the arrows button, and

set time and date using the jog

dial.The images recorded by a day

before the set time and date will be

subject to be deleted.

z Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2

seconds or more.

The SETUP MENU will be displayed on the monitor 2 and

the VGA monitor.

SET UP MENU Maintenance Recording

Switcher Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

LIVE

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate Status

Disk Info.

CAM

1ips

Version Info.

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

n Move the cursor to "DELETE" and

Maintenance

press the SET button.

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

Event Log

Error Log

SUPER FINE

FINE

The confirmation window will be displayed.

Access Log

NORMAL

EXTENDED

m Select "OK" using the arrows button

and press the SETUP/ESC button.

To not delete, select "CANCEL".

, Press the SET button for 2 seconds

or more.

The SETUP MENU will be closed and live image will be dis-

played.

FORMAT (INITIALIZE) A DVD-RAM DISK

To copy (duplicate) recorded images onto the DVD-RAM

disk, formatting (initializing) the DVD-RAM disk is required

in advance.

c Select "Data Delete" using the

arrows button (D C ).

To delete images recorded on the DVD-RAM disk, format-

ting (initialization) of the DVD-RAM disk will be necessary.

Important

All data on the disk will be deleted if formatted (initialized).

It is impossible to recover the deleted images.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

v Press the SET button.

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

The cursor will be displayed on the "Data Delete" menu.

BUSY

z Press the ESC/SETUP button for 2

seconds or more.

The SETUP MENU will be displayed on the monitor 2 and

the VGA monitor.

b Select whether "COPY1" or "COPY2"

(port to which the DVD-RAM is

connected) for "Disc Format of DVD"

using the arrows button.

x Select "Maintenance" using the

arrows button and press the SET

button.

n Press the SET button to select

"FORMAT". The confirmation

window will be displayed.

m Move the cursor to "OK" and press

the SET button to start formatting.

To not start formatting, select "CANCEL" and press the SET

button.

During formatting, the status window will be displayed.

The status window will be closed automatically when com-

pleting formatting.

, Press the SETUP/ESC button to

close the SETUP MENU window.

Live image will be displayed on the monitor 2 and the VGA

monitor.

DISPLAY/EDIT TEXT INFORMATION

It is possible to attach text information to images when

recording.

Entering 20 characters for a line (up to 10 lines, with a total

of 200 characters) for text information is possible.

These are the descriptions of how to display/edit the

attached text information to images.

c Press the TEXT button to display the

TEXT INFORMATION window.

日時

カメラ

イベント

テキスト

イベント

フィルター解除

テキスト

日時

C A M

0 3 .A P R .2 5 *1 2 :3 4 :5 6 A M

0 1 ch

M A N U A L

A B C D EFG H IJK LM N O P

Note: Displaying/editing text information is possible during

the following.

• While pausing playback on a single screen

• While displaying the recording event list window

0 3 .A P R 2 5 *2 :3 4 :5 6 A M → 0 3 .A P R .2 5 *1 2 :3 4 :5 6 A M

TO TA L

1 2 3 4 5

TIM E& D A TE　S EA R C H 　R EC EV EN T　S EA R C H 　V M D 　S EA R C H 　M A R K

Text information attached to the paused playback image or

text information attached to the selected recording event

will be displayed.

To close the TEXT INFORMATION window, press the

SETUP/ESC button or the SET button.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

REPEAT

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

z <While pausing playback on a single

screen>

10/0

PRESET

/AUTO

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to

stop playback.

b c n n

Select a desired recording event by rotating the jog dial.

v Press the TEXT button again to edit

text information.

日時

カメラ

イベント

テキスト

イベント

フィルター解除

テキスト

日時

C A M

0 3 .A P R .2 5 *1 2 :3 4 :5 6 A M

0 1 ch

M A N U A L

A B C D EFG H IJK LM N O P

TEXT INFORMATION

12345678901234567890

WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST

12345678901234567890

WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST

12345678901234567890

0 3 .A P R 2 5 *2 :3 4 :5 6 A M → 0 3 .A P R .2 5 *1 2 :3 4 :5 6 A M

TO TA L

1 2 3 4 5

TIM E& D A TE　S EA R C H 　R EC EV EN T　S EA R C H 　V M D 　S EA R C H 　M A R K

WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST

12345678901234567890

EDIT : [TEXT] SET : [SET] CANCEL : [ESC]

x Press the SHIFT button.

The SHIFT indicator will light.

b Edit text information using the

arrows button and the jog dial.

• To insert a character

Move the cursor to a desired point where a character to

be inserted using the arrows button, and select a char-

acter using the jog dial.

• To delete a character

Move the cursor to a character to be deleted using the

arrows button, and press the STOP button.

• To delete all characters

Press the STOP button for 2 seconds or more.

• Available characters

The following characters can be entered:

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W XY Z a

b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 12 3 4 5 6

7 8 9!"#$%' ()*+, - ./: ;<=>?@[ ¥ ] ^ _`{|}~SP(space)

n Press the SET button to apply the

edited characters.

TEXT INFORMATION

12345678901234567890

WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST

12345678901234567890

WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST

12345678901234567890

WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST

12345678901234567890

EDIT : [TEXT] SET : [SET] CANCEL : [ESC]

To cancel the edit, press the SETUP/ESC button. The edit-

ed characters will not be applied.

ERROR/WARNINGS

• The "error" status

When a fatal error (highly possible to cause the system down) occurred, the ERROR indicator will blink red.

• The "warning" status

When an error (even though it will not cause the system trouble yet, but it is possible to become a fatal error) occurred, the

ERROR indicator will blink orange.

Indication

ALT-*

Status

Description

Solution

Error

Recorded image had altered.

Playback will be paused.

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

cel the error status. Press the

PLAY/PAUSE button to resume play-

back.

R-ERROR

Error

Failed to read data from the HDD.

The HDD may be malfunctioning.

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

cel the error status. Contact the dealer

to replace the hard disk.

W-ERROR

SMART

Failed to write data on the HDD.

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

cel the error status. Contact the dealer

to replace the hard disk.

Warning

The hard disk may be malfunctioning

and may not work correctly.

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

cel the warning status. Contact the deal-

er to replace the hard disk.

H-METER

The set time for the HOUR METER has

passed. (Refer to page XX.)

It may be reaching the end of the hard

disk’s lifetime.

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

cel the warning status. Contact the deal-

er to replace the hard disk.

THERMAL

POWER

Warning

Thermal error of the unit or the extension Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

unit is detected.

cel the warning status. In case thermal

error occurs frequently, the unit may be

malfunctioning. Contact the dealer.

The power outage alert signal is sup-

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

plied from the uninterruptible power sup- cel the warning status. The unit will start

ply system (UPS). Internal processing operation automatically after the UPS

will start when the set time for "Shutdown starts power supply.

Time" on the "Basic Setup" menu of

"System" has passed after received the

power outage alert signal. (Refer to

page XX.) When the internal processing

starts, recording will stop and all opera-

tions will be invalid.

#-nn% (available

Error

The hard disk is almost full or completely Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

disk size is running Warning

out)

#-FULL (no avail-

able disk size)

full.

cel the error or the warning status.

Initialize or replace the hard disk. (Refer

to page XX.) When initialized, all record-

ed data will be deleted. It is recom-

mended to copy the data using an exter-

nal recording device.

The DVD-RAM disk is almost full or com- Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

pletely full.

cel the error or the warning status.

Initialize the DVD-RAM disk. (Refer to

page XX.) When initialized, all recorded

data will be deleted.

The CD-R or DVD-R disk is almost full or Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

completely full.

cel the error or the warning status.

Replace the disk with new one.

Indication

MEDIUM-n

Status

Warning

Description

Solution

The external recording device is not

operable because no disk or different

format disk is inserted, etc.

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

cel the warning status. Confirm that a

disk is inserted, or check the inserted

disk format.

REMOVE

FAN

Error

An error occurred on the hard disk and

the hard disk is unmounted from the sys- cel the error status. Contact the dealer.

tem automatically.

Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

Warning

The fan of this unit or the extension unit Press the ALARM RESET button to can-

is malfunctioning. It may produce an

increase in temperature in the unit and

cause malfunction of the HDDs.

cel the warning status. Contact the deal-

er.

* : Camera number

# : Partition number (Refer to page XX.)

nn : Available disk space (percentage)

n : COPY port number to which an external recording device is connected

OPERATION USING A SYSTEM CONTROLLER

It is possible to operate this unit using a PS·Data compatible system controller.

The followings are the descriptions of how to operate this unit using the system controller WV-CU360C.

To operate this unit using a PS·Data compatible system controller, perform the required settings in advance. Refer to a system

administrator for further information.

Note: To perform the operation with buttons with the shadowed background ( ), press the SHIFT button of the system con-

troller to light the SHIFT indicator on the right side of the SHIFT button.

Item

WJ-HD316/WJ-HD309

WV-CU360C

Note

SETUP

/ESC

Open/Close the SETUP

FUNCTION

Select an item

DOWN

REV

FWD

EL-ZOOM

STILL

Change the set para-

meter

–

CAM

Change the cursor

position

SET

CAM

Press a button on the

pop-up menu

SET

MON

SETUP

/ESC

Return to the previous

ESC

SETUP

Set on the SETUP

→

Summer time OFF

Summer time ON

FUNCTION

SETUP

Set on the SETUP

→

FUNCTION

SETUP

Set on the SETUP

Timer recording OFF

Timer recording EXT

FUNCTION

SETUP

Set on the SETUP

FUNCTION

SETUP

Display the recording

event list

Press the [5] button to select whether to display

the searching filter window or not.

FUNCTION

SETUP

Display the VMD

search list

FUNCTION

SETUP

Display the marking list

FUNCTION

SETUP

Display the menu for

playback by designat-

ing time and date

→

Press the SET button to resume playback.

FUNCTION

Move the cursor for

searching item

Press A or B .

DOWN

REV

FWD

EL-ZOOM

STILL

Display a list/thumbnail

Move the cursor to

select

–

SETUP

/ESC

SETUP

Close the searching

window

FUNCTION

Item

Alarm reset

WJ-HD316/WJ-HD309

WV-CU360C

ALM RESET

Note

ALARM

RESET

ALM RECALL

ALM SUSPEND

ALARM

RESET

SET

Alarm suspension

Manual recording

SETUP

REC

REC STOP

→

FUNCTION

SETUP

Press for 2

seconds or

REC

REC STOP

Stop manual recording

Available only during recording

FUNCTION

SETUP

STOP

REC

REC STOP

Press 2

Stop playback/manual

recording

Both recording and playback will be stopped if

operating the controller as shown on the left.

seconds

or more

FUNCTION

SETUP

PLAY

PAUSE

Press the SET button to play the selected result

from the searching window.

Play

FUNCTION

SETUP

REV

FWD

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

–

During

playback

Play at normal speed

Play at 2x speed

Play at 5x speed

Play at 10x speed

Play at 20x speed

Play at 50x speed

Play at 100x speed

FUNCTION

SETUP

REV

FWD

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

Reverse play at normal

speed

–

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

REV

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

Reverse play at 2x

speed

–

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

Reverse play at 5x

speed

–

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

Reverse play at 10x

speed

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

Reverse play at 20x

speed

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Rotate

the shut-

tle ring

Reverse play at 50x

speed

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Rotate

Reverse play at 100x

speed

the shut-

tle ring

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

PLAY

PAUSE

Pause playback

Available only during playback

FUNCTION

Item

WJ-HD316/WJ-HD309

WV-CU360C

Note

REV

FWD

SETUP

Rotate

the jog-

daial

–

→

Skip to the next frame

Available only during pause

During

pausing

FUNCTION

SETUP

REV

FWD

Rotate

the jog-

daial

Skip to the previous

frame

–

Available only during pause

During

pausing

FUNCTION

SETUP

REV

FWD

The point to be skipped will be different

between normal playback and filtered play-

back.

Rotate

the jog-

daial

–

→

Skip forward

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

REV

FWD

The point to be skipped will be different

between normal playback and filtered play-

back.

Rotate

the jog-

daial

–

Skip backward

During

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

A-B

ZOOM/

FOCUS

Mark start point for the

A - B repeat playback

REPEAT

→

Available only during playback

Available only during the filtered playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

A-B

REPEAT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

Mark end point for the

A - B repeat playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

A-B

REPEAT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

Cancel the A-B repeat

playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

GOTO

LAST

Skip to the latest

recorded image

PAN/TILT

IRIS

FUNCTION

SETUP

LISTED

Filtering off

Filtering on

FUNCTION

SETUP

IRIS

SHIFT

LISTED

Mark

Available only when it is possible to switch to

the filtered playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Mark a point

(For WJ-HD316)

FUNCTION

SETUP

Mark

Mark a point

(For WJ-HD309)

FUNCTION

MON

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

→

Select the monitor 1

Select the monitor 2

ESC

MON

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

ESC

SEQUENCE

SEQ

SHIFT

Sequential display ON

(For WJ-HD316)

It is possible to stop the sequential display by

pressing a camera selection button.

SEQUENCE

S E Q

Sequential display ON

(For WJ-HD309)

It is possible to stop the sequential display by

pressing a camera selection button.

CAM

Camera

number

Select a camera

(For WJ-HD316)

Camera selection but-

tons (1 - 16)

→

SET

CAM

Camera

number

Select a camera

(For WJ-HD309)

Camera selection but-

tons (1 - 9)

→

SET

4-split screen:

MULTI SCREEN SELECT

Select a multi-screen

(For WJ-HD316)

SHIFT

For WJ-HD316: 1 - 4 CH → 5 - 8 CH →

9 - 12 CH →13 - 16 CH → 1 - 4 CH ...

For WJ-HD309: 1 - 4 CH → 5 - 8 CH → 9 CH →

1 - 4 CH ...

SHIFT

9-split screen:

For WJ-HD316: 1 - 9 CH → 10 - 16 CH →

1 - 9 CH...

MULTI SCREEN SELECT

Select a multi-screen

(For WJ-HD309)

SHIFT

For WJ-HD309: 1 - 9 CH → 10 - 16 CH

16-split screen:

Only for WJ-HD316: 1 - 16 CH

SHIFT

Item

WJ-HD316/WJ-HD309

WV-CU360C

Note

EL-ZOOM

A-B

REPEAT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

Zooming portion changes in the order: 2x → 4x

Zoom ON/OFF

→ 1x

SETUP

TEXT

SHIFT

Text information display

ON (For WJ-HD316)

Available only when displaying a list or when

pausing playback

→

FUNCTION

SETUP

TEXT

SHIFT

Text information display

ON (For WJ-HD309)

Available only when displaying a list or when

pausing playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

Text information display

OFF (For WJ-HD316)

Available only when displaying text information

FUNCTION

SETUP

Text information display

OFF (For WJ-HD309)

FUNCTION

SETUP

COPY

Display the DATA COPY

menu (For WJ-HD316)

Available only when displaying live images or a

list, or when pausing playback

10/0

FUNCTION

SETUP

COPY

Display the DATA COPY

menu (For WJ-HD309)

Available only when displaying live images or a

list, or when pausing playback

FUNCTION

SETUP

/ESC

When displaying

the copy setup

Close the DATA COPY

Available only when displaying the DATA COPY

FUNCTION

SETUP

COPY

Cancel copying

(For WJ-HD316)

During

copying

10/0

FUNCTION

SETUP

COPY

Cancel copying

(For WJ-HD309)

During

copying

FUNCTION

SETUP

OSD

SHIFT

Switch displayed infor-

mation (For WJ-HD316)

FUNCTION

SETUP

OSD

SHIFT

Switch displayed infor-

mation (For WJ-HD309)

FUNCTION

OPERATION USING A PC

It is possible to perform the settings or operate the unit

using a web browser installed on a PC when this unit is

connected to a network.

The available features and the system requirements of a

PC are as follows.

ꢀꢀSystem Requirements of a PC

It is recommended to operate this unit using a PC meets

the following system requirements.

OS:

Refer to the Network Operating Instructions (pdf) on the

provided CD-ROM.

One of the following operating systems:

Microsoft^®Windows^®2000 Professional SP4

Microsoft^®Windows^®XP Professional or Home Edition

SP1

ꢀꢀFeatures

It is possible to operate this unit using a web browser in

much the same way as using the buttons on the front panel

of this unit.

PC:

IBM PC/AT Compatible

CPU:

The following functions are available when using a PC via a

network as well as the functions operable using the buttons

on the front panel of the unit.

Intel Pentium‚ IV 1.4 GHz or faster

Memory:

256 MB or more

ꢀꢀDownloading/transmitting images

Monitor:

It is possible to download (save) the currently displayed

image in the web browser window onto the hard disk of a

PC. By establishing an FTP server, it is possible to transmit

images to a designated FTP server. When an event occurs,

it is possible to transmit images from the camera installed

in the place where the event occurred.

1024 x 768 pixels or more, HIGH color 16 bit or more

Interface:

Built-in network interface card compatible 10/100 Mbps

Recommended web browser:

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5SP2, 6.0 SP1

Other web browsers are not compatible with this unit.

ꢀꢀEvent notification function

Important

When an event occurs, it is possible to send e-mails to

designated addresses to notify of the event occurrence. It

is also possible to send an e-mail with a recorded image of

the place where the event occurred.

The plug-in software is required to be installed. Install the

plug-in software from the provided CD-ROM.

Refer to "readme.txt" on the provided CD-ROM for the

descriptions of how to install it.

ꢀꢀHost authentication

It is possible to restrict devices from operating this unit if

their IP addresses are not registered.

INSTALLATION IN THE RACK

1. Remove the rubber legs (6 pcs.) on the bottom of the

unit.

• Use a flat-blade screwdriver and remove the screws.

Remove the rubber legs.

Mounting screws for rack mounting brackets

(accessories)

2. Install the rack mounting brackets on both sides of the

unit.

• Using the mounting screws (4 pcs.) for the rack mount-

ing brackets, fix them firmly.

Rack mounting brackets (accessories)

3. Install the unit in the rack.

• Fix the unit firmly with the rack mounting screws (4

pcs.).

Rack mounting screws

For our rack: Nominal diameter 5 tapping (accessory)

Important:

• The cooling fan inside the unit is perishable and necessary to be replaced periodically.

• Do not block the ventilation openings or slots in the cover to prevent the unit from overheating.

• If the rack is subject to vibration, secure the rear of the unit to the rack using additional mounting brackets (procured local-

ly).

ABOUT THE HDD SAFETY MODE

When maintaining or installing/uninstalling this unit in/from

the rack without turning the power of the unit off, do the

above work operation after setting the HDD SAFETY MODE

to ON.

This can be set on the "Disk Info." menu of "Maintenance".

Refer to page XX for further information.

Important

The HDDs will not start up with the default setting when

installing this unit in the rack without turning the power of

the unit off, to prevent malfunction caused by shock or

vibration.

After completing the installation, set the HDD SAFETY

MODE to OFF. Otherwise, the unit will be unable to operate

when turning the power on after the shutdown caused by

unexpected incident such as power outage.

x Move the cursor to OFF using the

arrows button (A B ) and press the

SET button.

The unit will restart automatically and the system check

complete window will be displayed.

Operating the unit for the first time

Do the followings when operating the unit for the first time.

Important

When connecting an optional extension unit (WJ-HDE300

series), turn the power of the extension unit before turning

the power of this unit on.

c Press the SET button after the

system check complete window is

displayed.

z Turn the POWER switch on the rear

panel of the unit on.

The OPERATE indicator will light and the system check will

start.

The splash window (as shown below) will be displayed on

the monitor 2 and the VGA monitor.

The HDD DISK MENU window will be displayed.

Perform the settings with this menu according to your

needs.

Refer to page XX for further information.

When the system check has been completed, the HDD

SAFETY MODE window (as shown below) will be displayed.

The camera selection buttons on the front panel (1 - 16 for

WJ-HD316, 1 – 9, 0 for WJ-HD309) will light green and

orange (for 2 seconds each) alternately.

After completing the settings, press any button to close the

HDD DISK MENU.

The login window will be displayed.

v Enter a user name and password.

PREPARATION FOR MAINTENACE

(RACK MOUNTING/UNMOUNTING,

ETC.)

Live image will be displayed on the monitor 2 and the VGA

monitor.

Refer to page XX for further information about the user

name and password.

Do the followings before start operation when maintaining

or installing/uninstalling the unit in the rack.

z Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2

seconds or more.

The SETUP MENU will be displayed on the monitor 2 and

the VGA monitor.

Notes:

• With the default setting, all the disk space is set as the

normal recording area. Perform the settings of each

recording area according to your needs.

• The default user name and password are as follows:

User name: ADMIN

Password: 12345

b Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2

x Select "System" using the arrows

seconds or more.

button and press the SET button.

The SETUP MENU will be displayed.

Adjust the clock of the unit with this menu.

Refer to page XX for further information about clock adjust-

ment.

c Move the cursor to "Disk Info." using

the arrows button (D C ) and press

the SET button.

n With the default setting, the unit is

ready to start manual recording.

Perform the settings for recordings

or event actions according to your

needs.

v Move the cursor to "HDD SAFETY

MODE" and rotate the jog dial to

select "ON ".

b Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2

seconds or more.

The SETUP MENU will be closed.

The unit will restart automatically and the HDD SAFETY

MODE window will be displayed.

The HDD safety mode will begin.

The camera selection buttons (1 - 16 for WJ-HD316, 1 – 9,

0 for WJ-HD309) will light green and orange (for 2 seconds

each) alternately.

The following window will be displayed after around 30 sec-

onds.

Start maintenance after this window is displayed.

After completing the maintenance, follow the procedures

from step 2 of "Operating the unit for the first time" on page

xx.

CONNECTIONS

Connections when the unit is used independently:

An example of connections is shown below when the unit is used independently.

Important:

• The power plug should be connected last.

• When connecting combination cameras , connect them to the video input connectors 1 - 8 (for coaxial communication).

ꢀꢀExamples of connections

Monitor 1

Monitor 2

Mode switch setting (Factory default)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Microphone

Note: If the DATA and RS485 ports are not

used, the mode switches should be used as

illustrated.

Amplifier

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY 1

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

OUT

VIDEO

120 V AC

60 Hz

For Audio Amplifier

•

System cameras

VIDEO IN 9 - 16)

Combination cameras

(VIDEO IN 1 - 8)

ꢀꢀConnections with an extension unit:

An example of connections is shown below when the unit is used together with an extension unit.

This unit can be connected with up to seven extension units.

Connect the EXT IN port on the rear panel of the extension unit and the EXT STORAGE port on the rear panel of this unit using

the cable provided with the extension unit.

Important:

• Use the cable provided with the extension unit.

• Fix the cables with the cable clamp (provided with each unit) to prevent disconnection or unstable connection that may

cause the failure of recording or the unstable system.

How to fix the cable clamp

Cable Clamp

COPY

10/100BASE-T

EXIT ST

ORA

Fixing screw

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

OUT

VIDEO

This unit

Cable (attached to the extension unit)

SIGNAL GND

POWER

AC IN

EXT

OUT

Extension unit (WJ-HDE300)

Cable Clamp

Fixing screw

EXT

OUT

How to fix the cable clamp

ꢀꢀConnections with DVD-RAM, CD-R, and DVD-R drives

This is an example of connection when the unit is used together with the designated DVD-RAM, DVD-R and CD-R drive.

Connect the designated DVD-RAM, DVD-R and CD-R drive and the COPY1 port on the rear panel or the COPY2 port inside the

connectors cover on the front panel of this unit using an USB cable (locally procured).

Important:

• Use an appropriate USB cable compatible with USB2.0 standard.

• Fix the cables with the cable clamp (provided with this unit) to prevent disconnection or unstable connection that may

cause the failure of recording or the unstable system.

Designated DVD-RAM drive, etc.

How to fix the cable clamp

USB cable (Locally procured)

Cable Clamp

COPY

10/100BASE-T

EXIT ST

ORA

Fixing screw

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

OUT

VIDEO

Rear

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

TIMER

S-VIDEO

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

ERROR

ALARM

VIDEO

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

COPY

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

OUT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

ALARM

SUSPEND

REPEAT

ALARM

RESET

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

AUDIO

OUT

HDD 1

HDD 2

PRESET

/AUTO

OPERATE

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

Front

USB cable (Locally procured)

Designated DVD-RAM drive, etc.

ꢀꢀConnections with the VCR

When it is necessary to copy the recorded images to a video tape using a VCR, connect the VCR to the S-VIDEO connector (or

the VIDEO OUT connector) and the AUDIO OUT connector inside the connectors cover on the front panel of this unit as below.

Open the terminal cover.

STOP

PLAY

PAUSE

REC

REC STOP

MONITOR1

MONITOR2

REV

FWD

TIMER

S-VIDEO

GOTO

LAST

PAN/TILT

ERROR

ALARM

VIDEO

SHIFT

SEQ

OSD

COPY

SETUP

/ESC

PAN/TILT

SLOW

OUT

ZOOM/

FOCUS

A-B

ALARM

SUSPEND

REPEAT

ALARM

RESET

–

DISK SELECT

EL-ZOOM

COPY

TEXT

MARK

IRIS

LISTED

10/0

AUDIO

OUT

HDD 1

HDD 2

PRESET

/AUTO

OPERATE

LOGOUT

SET

BUSY

AUDIO

Ordinary audio cable (with a RCA pin plug)

VTR

VIDEO

S-IN terminal

Note: The same video signal supplied to the MONITOR1 connector and to the MONITOR (VGA) connector will be supplied to

the S-VIDEO connector and the VIDEO OUT connector inside the connectors cover.

The same audio signal supplied to the AUDIO OUT connector on the rear panel of this unit will be supplied to the AUDIO

OUT connector inside the connectors cover on the front panel.

ꢀꢀConnections with PS·Data systems

This is an example of connection when the unit is used together with the PS·Data devices.

If a connected system controller is PS·Data compatible, it is possible to operate this unit or connected devices using the sys-

tem controller.

Use the RS485 cable provided with the system controller.

Important:

• Terminate the both devices on the both ends of the connection. Refer to the respective operating instructions for the

descriptions of how to terminate. Termination of this unit can be set with the mode switch on the rear panel. (See below.)

• When connecting a PS·Data compatible device, it is necessary to set each item of "PS·Data Setup" of "Com" on the SETUP

MENU according to the system configuration.

• The PS·Data is our exclusive protocol. Contact dealer about devices can be connected.

ꢀꢀWhen this unit is installed between the controller and the system device (when

this unit is used as a receiver)

System Controller

RS485 cable (provided with the controller)

Mode switch

(No. 8: ON)

Controller

Termination: ON

Unit Address : 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

AC IN

OUT

VIDEO

"PS·Data setup" of "Com" on the SETUP MENU

• Unit Address (System) : 1

• Unit Address (Controller) : 2

ꢀꢀWhen this unit is connected with the system device (when this unit is used as a

controller)

System Controller

RS485 cable

UNIT

ALARM

RESET

POWER

ALARM

SUSPEND

SET

SET UP

ALARM

ESC

OFF

Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204

Coaxial communication unit

Termination: ON

Unit Address : 1

Controller

Termination: ON

Unit Address : 2

(No.8 : OFF)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Mode switch

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

OUT

VIDEO

"PS·Data setup" of "Com" on the SETUP MENU

• Unit Address (System) : 1

• Unit Address (Controller) : 2

RS485 cable

UNIT

ALARM

RESET

POWER

ALARM

SUSPEND

SET

SET UP

ALARM

ESC

OFF

Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204

Coaxial communication unit

Termination: ON

Mode switch

(No. 7: ON)

Unit Address : 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

UNIT

ALARM

RESET

OUT

POWER

ALARM

SET UP

SUSPEND

SET ESC

SUSPEND

ALARM

VIDEO

OFF

Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204

Coaxial communication unit

Termination: OFF

Unit Address : 2

"PS·Data setup" of "Com" on the SETUP MENU

• Unit Address (System) : 1

• Unit Address (Controller) : 1

ꢀꢀCascade connection of multiple units

Up to of four units can be connected.

For the cascade connection, connect the CASCADE IN connector and the CASCADE OUT connector on the rear panel of each

unit as below.

Important:

When connecting the unit in the cascade connection, set "Cascade" of "PS·Data Setup" in "Com" on the SETUP MENU to "ON".

(Page xx)

ꢀꢀWhen no PS·Data compatible device is connected to the system

Monitor 2

Monitor 1

Mode switch

(No. 7: ON)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Unit Address settings

of "PS·Data Setup" of

"Com" on the SETUP

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

First unit (this unit)

System : 1

Controller : 1

OUT

VIDEO

RS485 Cable

Mode switch

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

(No. 8: OFF)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Second unit

System : 2

Controller : 2

OUT

VIDEO

RS485 Cable

Mode switch

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

(No. 8: ON)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Third unit

System : 3

Controller : 3

OUT

VIDEO

ꢀꢀWhen the PS·Data compatible device is connected to the first unit (when this unit

is used as a receiver)

Controller

Termination: ON

Unit Address : 1

Monitor 2

Monitor 1

System Controller

RS485 cable

(provided with

the controller)

Mode switch

(No. 8: OFF)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Unit Address settings

of "PS·Data Setup" of

"Com" on the SETUP

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

First unit (this unit)

System : 1

Controller : 2

OUT

VIDEO

RS485 cable

Mode switch

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

(No. 8: OFF)

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Second unit

System : 2

Controller : 3

OUT

VIDEO

RS485 cable

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

Mode switch

(No. 8: ON)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Third unit

System : 3

Controller : 4

OUT

VIDEO

ꢀꢀWhen the PS·Data compatible device is connected to the third unit (when this unit

is used as a receiver)

Monitor 2

Monitor 1

Mode switch

(No. 7: ON)

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Unit Address settings

of "PS·Data Setup" of

"Com" on the SETUP

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

First unit (this unit)

System : 1

Controller : 1

OUT

VIDEO

RS485 cable

Mode switch

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

(No. 8: OFF)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Second unit

System : 2

Controller : 2

OUT

VIDEO

RS485 cable

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

Mode switch

(No. 8: OFF)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Third unit

System : 3

Controller : 3

OUT

VIDEO

Coaxial communication unit

Termination: ON

UNIT

ALARM

RESET

POWER

ALARM

SUSPEND

SET

SET UP

ESC

ALARM

OFF

Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204

RS485 cable

PS Data Compatible

When the PS·Data compatible devices are connected to the first and third units

(when this unit is used as a receiver)

PS Data application

System Controller

Monitor 2

Monitor 1

Controller

Termination: ON

Unit Address: 1

RS485 cable

(provided with

the controller)

Mode switch

(No. 8: OFF)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

Unit Address settings

of "PS·Data Setup" of

"Com" on the SETUP

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

First unit (this unit)

System : 1

Controller : 2

OUT

VIDEO

RS485 cable

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

Mode switch

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

(No. 8: OFF)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Second unit

System : 2

Controller : 3

OUT

VIDEO

BNC Cable

(Locally procured)

RS485 cable

Mode switch

(No. 8: OFF)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Third unit

System : 3

Controller : 4

OUT

VIDEO

UNIT

ALARM

RESET

POWER

ALARM

SUSPEND

Coaxial communication unit

SUSPEND

SET

SET UP

ALARM

ESC

OFF

Termination: ON

RS485 cable

Data Multiplex Unit WJ-MP204

PS Data Compatible

ꢀꢀConnection with the RS485 camera

This is an example of connection when the unit is used together with the RS485 devices.

Up to eight cameras can be connected using a single RS485 (CAMERA) port.

Important:

• Terminate the both devices on the both ends of the connection. Refer to the respective operating instructions for the

descriptions of how to terminate. Termination of this unit can be set with the mode switch on the rear panel.

• When connecting an RS485 camera, it is necessary to set each item of "RS485 Setup" of "Com" on the SETUP MENU

according to the RS485 settings of the camera. (Refer to page xx.)

• The total length of the RS485 cable from this unit is 1 200 meters at the maximum.

ꢀꢀ1:1 connection

Connect a camera to the RS485 (CAMERA) port.

Example: When the RS485 cameras are connected to the CAMERA IN connectors 9 and 13:

Mode switch

(No. 1, No. 4 : ON)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

PS·DATA

RS-485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXIT STORAGE

OUT

CAMERA

RS485 cable

Combination Camera

Connect the RS485 camera to Switches required to be set

4-wire communication

2-wire communication

No.2

OFF

RS485 (1)

No.3

No.5

OFF

RS485 (2)

No.6

ꢀꢀDaisy connection

Multiple cameras can be connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port.

Example: When the cameras 1 - 4 are connected to one of the RS485 (CAMERA) port and the cameras 9 - 12 are connected to

the other RS485 (CAMERA) port.

RS485 cable

Mode switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Nos. 1,2,3,4,5,6 : ON

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

OUT

VIDEO

Unit No. 12 Unit No. 11 Unit No. 10 Unit No. 9

Termination: Termination: Termination: Termination:

ON OFF OFF OFF

Unit No. 4

Unit No. 3

Unit No. 2

Unit No. 1

Termination: Termination: Termination: Termination:

OFF

Connect the RS485 camera to Switches required to be set

4-wire communication

2-wire communication

No.2

OFF

RS485 (1)

No.3

No.5

OFF

RS485 (2)

No.6

ꢀꢀMode Switch

RS485 interface is used to communicate between this unit and the PS·Data compatible system device ,. In this case, it is

required to terminate the both devices on the both ends of the RS485 connection.

The settings of the mode switch will be different whether this unit is used as a receiver or a controller.

When an RS 485 camera is connected to this unit, it is required to terminate the both devices on the both ends of the connec-

tion.

• When connecting this unit with the system controller and

this unit is installed at the end of the PS·Data connection

PS·Data termination switch 1: ON

RS485 (1) terminating switch

RS485 (1) 2/4-wire changeover

RS485 (2) terminating switch

• When connecting a system device and this unit is installed

at the end of the PS·Data connection

PS·Data terminating switch 2: ON

RS485 (2) 2/4-wire changeover

PS•Data terminating switch 1

PS•Data terminating switch 2

• When connecting RS485 cameras

Set the termination switch of the connected RS485 (CAMERA)

port to ON.

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 1: Set the RS485 (1)

termination switch to ON.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 2: Set the RS485 (2)

termination switch to ON.

• For 2W communication

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 1: Set the switch No.2 and No.3 to ON.

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 2: Set the switch No.5 and No.6 to ON.

• For 4W communication

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 1: Set the switch No.2 and No.3 to OFF.

Connected to the RS485 (CAMERA) port 2: Set the switch No.5 and No.6 to OFF.

ꢀꢀRS485 Port

Internal block diagram

DATA

TA TB RA RB

Output Input

ꢀꢀHow to Use the Alarm/Control Terminals

These terminals are used for emergency recording, auto time adjustment (Auto Adjust Time), taking measures against power

outages (Shutdown Time), and when installing a buzzer, a lamp, and such an alarming device. They are also used to synchro-

nize with the sequential display changeover.

The terminal pin array and connections are exemplified

below. The connector to be used should be manufactured

according to the pin array.

ALARM/CONTOROL

Pin array

Pin No.

Ch 8 alarm output

Ch 9 alarm output

Ch 10 alarm output

Ch 11 alarm output

Ch 12 alarm output

Ch 13 alarm output

Ch 14 alarm output

Ch 15 alarm output

Ch 16 alarm output

Operation

Alarm signal output at an event occurrence

Remarks

Open collector output

24 V max., 100 mA

Alarm display reset input Canceling the alarm display

Non-voltage make contact input

–100 mA, 5 V pull-up

Starting emergency recording disk space a sig-

nal input

Emergency recording

input

13, 14

Earth (Grounding)

Generation of signal output for disk space alarm- Open collector output

Alarm output for available

disk space of device con-

nected to copy port

ing of DVD-RAM, DVD-R, CD-R

24 V max., 100 mA

Signal output upon detection of HDD error

Signal output upon detection of camera error

Signal output upon detection of unit error

HDD error output

Camera error output

Error output

Signal output upon completion of outage pro-

cessing

High (+12V)

End of outage process-

ing

Time of this unit is adjusted to the preset time

30 kΩ 5 V pull-up,

according to the signal input. This signal output is –100mA/make contact

then generated for the setting time of this unit.

Time of all other units is adjusted to the setting

time of this unit.

Time adjustment I/O

Sequence changeover is effected according to

the signal input. Signal output is generated at the

time of sequence changeover.

Sequence changeover

I/O

The state of alarm suspension is assumed

according to the signal input.

Alarm suspension input

Outage detection I/O

Start of outage processing according to the sig-

nal input.

Non-voltage make contact input

–100 mA/5 V pull-up

Changeover to the external recording mode

+5V output

External recording mode

changeover

+5V output

200 mA max.

ꢀꢀConnection for emergency recording

When the external switch is turned ON, emergency recording will be started.

Resolution, recording time, recording rate and quality for emergency recording can differ according to the settings of

"Emergency REC" in "Recording" of the SETUP MENU. (Refer to page xx.)

(Earth)

(Emergency record input)

(13)

(12)

External switch

ALARM/CONTOROL

ꢀꢀConnection for external recording changeover

When the external switch is turned ON, recording program changeover is effected for recording.

The recording program can be set for "External Recording Mode" with the "Time Table" in "Schedule" of the SETUP MENU.

(Refer to page xx.)

(Earth)

(External recording mode)

(13)

(12)

External switch

ALARM/CONTOROL

ꢀꢀConnection to synchronize the sequential display changeover (when multiple

units are used)

Sequential display changeover is effected with the timing of supplying signals to the sequence changeover input terminal.

When multiple units are used, the sequence timing can be synchronized.

Setting for the sequence timing can be set with "Sequence Timing" in the "Switcher" of the SETUP MENU. (Refer to page xx.)

For the synchronization of the sequence timing between multiple units, there is difference in the sequence timing setting as

shown below between the synchronized side (Master) and the synchronizing side (Slave).

Synchronized side (Master): Set at "INT" (functioning as an output terminal)

Synchronizing side (Slave): Set at "EXT" (functioning as an input terminal)

(Earth)

(13)

(Earth)

(13)

(Sequence changeover input)

(21)

(Sequence changeover output)

(24)

ALARM/CONTOROL

WJ-HD316 (First unit)

ALARM/CONTOROL

WJ-HD316 (Second unit)

ꢀꢀConnection for the Auto Time Adjust function

• When "AutoTime Adjust" of "System" on the SETUP MENU is set to "MASTER"

"Time Adjust Output" becomes available and the clock of this unit can be applied to other units.

Terminal block of other units

Front LED

(Earth)

(Time adjust output)

monitor

output

(13)

(20)

ALARM/CONTOROL

• When "Auto Time Adjust" of "System"on the SETUP MENU is set to "SLAVE"

"Time Adjust Input" becomes available. When a signal output from other equipment is supplied to the time adjust I/O terminals

between 00 minutes 00 seconds and 14 minutes 59 seconds every hour or between 45 minutes 00 seconds and 59 minutes

59 seconds every hour, the clock will be set to "00 minutes 00 seconds" of the closest hour .

Example:

Signal is supplied at 2:50:00 (hour:minute:second)pm → Set at 3:00:00 pmM

Signal input supplied at 3:14:45 pm → Set at 3:00:00 pm

Signal issupplied at 3:20:00 pm → Time will not be adjusted.

Terminal block of other units

Front LED

(Earth)

(Time adjust output)

monitor

output

(13)

(20)

ALARM/CONTOROL

ꢀꢀConnection with the Uninterruptible Power System (UPS)

This is an example of connection with the uninterruptible power system (UPS) to be installed to protect from the power outage.

When a signal is supplied to the outage detection I/O terminals from the uninterruptible power system (UPS), internal process-

ing will be started to shut off the power supply for this unit.

After completing the internal processing, a signal will be supplied from the outage processing end output terminal to the unin-

terruptible power system (UPS). Then, the power supply to this unit can be suspended.

(GND)

（C O M ）

(Detection)

(Shutdown)

(Outage detection I/O)

(Outage processing end output)

* Refer to the operating

instructions of the used

product for further

information about

connection of the UPS side.

This unit

(13)

(23)

(19)

Uninterruptible

power system

(UPS)

Power cable

To an AC outlet

ALARM/CONTOROL

ꢀꢀConnection of the control output

• When an alarming device such as a buzzer or a lamp is connected, the signal output from Pin Nos. 15 - 18 can be used to

notify the status by sounding a buzzer or lighting a lamp.

• The following example is connection with the HDD error output (pin no. 16).

(GND)

(HDD error output)

(13)

(16)

Alarming device

Relay, etc.

Install according

to your needs

ALARM/CONTOROL

ꢀꢀHow to Use the Alarm Terminals

These terminals are used to connect the alarming devices, such as sensors, door switches, etc.

The pin array of these terminals are as shown below. The connector to be used should be manufactured according to the pin

array.

Pin Array

ALARM

Pin No.

Ch 1 alarm input

Ch 2 alarm input

Ch 3 alarm input

Ch 4 alarm input

Ch 5 alarm input

Ch 6 alarm input

Ch 7 alarm input

Ch 8 alarm input

Ch 1 alarm output

Ch 2 alarm output

Ch 3 alarm output

Ch 4 alarm output

Earth (Grounding)

Ch 9 alarm input

Ch 10 alarm input

Ch 11 alarm input

Ch 12 alarm input

Ch 13 alarm input

Ch 14 alarm input

Ch 15 alarm input

Ch 16 alarm input

Ch 5 alarm output

Ch 6 alarm output

Ch 7 alarm output

Operation

Remarks

Event action will be performed according

to the settings.

Non-voltage make contact/–100 mA,

5 V pull-up

Alarm signal will be supplied at an event

occurrence

Open collector output/24 V, 100 mA

13, 14

Event action will be performed according

to the setting.

Non-voltage make contact input/

–100 mA, 5 V pull-up

Alarm signal will be supplied at an event

occurrence

Open collector output/24 V max.,

100 mA

ꢀꢀAlarm connection

When a signal is supplied to the alarm input terminals ofCH 1 16, recording and displaying camera images will be performed

according to the settings.

When an alarming device such as a buzzer, a lamp, etc., is installed outside, connect them to the alarm output terminals (pin

nos. 9 - 12, pin nos. 23 - 25) or to the alarm output terminals (pin nos. 1 - 9) of the ALARM/CONTROL terminal.

Sensor

Security door

switch

(Ch 1 alarm output)

(9)

(16)

(1)

Alarming devices

Relay, etc.

(GND)

ALARM

(13)

(Ch 16 alarm output)

(9)

Alarming devices

Relay, etc.

(GND)

ALARM/CONTOROL

Install according to

your needs.

(13)

Time and polarities of the ALARM/CONTROL terminal and the ALARM terminal

Terminal

Active time

Note

Alarm input

100 ms or more

N.O.: L active

N.C.: H active

Alarm output

The set time on the SETUP MENU

100 ms or more

L active

Alarm reset input

Emergency recording input

100 ms or more

Alarm output for available disk space of While the size of the available disk

device connected to the copy port

space is less than the set size

HDD error output

Until the HDD error is cleared

L active

Camera error output

Error output

Until the camera error is cleared

Until the error is cleared

100 ms

L active

H active

L active

Outage processing end output

Time adjust I/O

Input: 100 ms or more

Output: 1 s

Sequence changeover output

Outage detection output

100 ms or more

L active

External recording mode changeover

Alarm suspend output

L active, judged by level

ꢀ How to Use the Serial Terminal

This terminal is compliant with the RS232C Standard, and is used to communicate with a connected PC.

Connection example and the pin array of the SERIAL terminal are as shown below.

Important

• When using the SERIAL terminal, it is necessary to perform the settings with "RS232C Settup" of "Com" on the SETUP

MENU for the communication functions. (Page XX)

ꢀ Pin Array

Serial terminal of this unit

D-sub Pin 9

Personal computer side

D-sub Pin 9

Pin No.

Frame

Shield

ꢀ Connection example

D-sub Pin 9

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Personal compute

OUT

VIDEO

This unit

SETUP

To operating this unit, it is necessary to set each item of the SETUP MENU in advance.

Perform the settings for each item of the SETUP MENU by displaying the SETUP MENU on the monitor 2.

Settings item are as below.

ꢀ Item list of the SETUP MENU

Setting menu

Maintenance

Description

Page

REC Rate Status

Display the recording rate in each recording mode and image quality for each

camera channel in list form.

Disk Info.

Display hard disk information such as available disk space of the built-in hard disk

and the connected extension unit.

Version Info.

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Display version information of the software and the hardware and the MAC

address.

Set actions to be taken when available space of the built-in hard disk or of the

connected extension unit reaches a specified level.

Set to display warning when available space of the built-in hard disk of the con-

nected extension unit reaches a specified level.

Delete data stored in the hard disk, or format (initialize) DVD-RAM disk connected

to the COPY port.

Maintenance

Activate the disk maintenance mode. Enter in this mode when replacing the hard

disk.

Event Log

Error Log

Display the event log. Refer to page xx for further information.

Display the error log such as a HDD error log.

Access Log

Display the time, user name and IP addresses when logging in/out to/from this

unit.

Recording

REC Setup

Perform the basic settings for recording.

Emergency REC

Perform the settings for emergency recording such as recording time and record-

ing rate.

Event

Event Setup

Perform the settings of the alarm output duration and the buzzer sounding when

an event (motion detection, video loss, command/terminal alarm) occurs.

VMD Setup

Perform the settings of the motion detection area, sensitivity and the detection

mode for each camera channel.

Alarm Setup

Perform the settings of the alarm display duration and alarm suspension duration.

Specify the alarm terminal polarity.

Terminal Setup

Schedule

Time Table

Create timetables for each day of the week, and assign the recording action pro-

grams and event action programs to the created timetables.

REC Prog

Up to 4 recording programs can be created. Perform the settings for the recording

actions for each program such as image quality and recording rate for each cam-

era channel.

EEvent Prog

Special Days

Up to 4 event programs can be created. Perform the settings for each program

such as the event action and the auto copy function for each event type.

Assign timetables independently as the special days aside from other days.

Setting menu

Switcher

Monitor1

Description

Page

Perform the settings for the image switching on the monitor 1 such as the setting

of the sequential display or the screen to be displayed at login on the monitor 1.

Monitor 2

Monitor2 Perform the settings for the image switching on the monitor 2 such as

the setting of the sequential display or the screen to be displayed at login on the

monitor 2 can be set.

Display

OSD Setup

Monitor1

Monitor2

Perform the display settings such as the settings for the display position of the

camera title and the time.

Perform the display settings for the monitor 1 such as the camera title display

on/off, the alarm display on/off and the time display on/off.

Perform the display settings for the monitor 2 such as the task bar style, the cam-

era title display position, and the camera title display on/off.

Com

Camera Control

PS.Data Setup

Set the communication type to control cameras for each camera channel.

Perform the settings for the PSÅEData. It is necessary to perform these settings

when connecting an external device such as a controller to the DATA port on the

rear panel of this unit.

RS485Setup

RS232C Setup

NW Setup 1

NW Setup 2

NTP Setup

Perform the settings for the RS485. It is necessary to perform these settings when

connecting an RS 485 compatible camera to the RS485 (CAMERA) port on the

rear panel of this unit.

Perform the settings for the SERIAL (RS232C). It is necessary to perform these

settings when connecting a PC to the SERIAL connector on the rear panel of this

unit.

Perform the basic network settings. It is necessary to perform these settings when

operating this unit via a network such as LAN. The settings for the user authentica-

tion and the host authentication also can be set with these settings.

Perform the network connection settings such as IP addresses and the gateway

address. It is necessary to perform these settings when operating this unit via a

network such as LAN.

Perform the NTP server settings such as the NTP server address and the time

zone setting. It is necessary to set to synchronize the clock with the NTP server.

System

Basic Setup

Time & Date

User Regist.

Perform the settings for the basic operation of this unit.

Perform the settings for the time adjustment and display of time and date.

Perform the settings for the user registration and the user authentication such as

user name, password and operational level.

User Edit

Edit the registered user information.

Delete registered users.

User Delete

Host Regist.

as IP address and operational level for the host authentication.

Host Edit

Edit the registered hosts.

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Delete the registered hosts.

Perform the settings to specify operable functions in each level.

The set contents can be saved or loaded.

ꢀ About the SETUP MENU

Main menu

Live image

SET UP MENU Maintenance Recording

Event

Com

Schedule

System

LIVE

Switcher

Display

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate Status

Disk Info.

CAM 1

CAM 2

CAM 3

CAM 4

CAM 5

CAM 6

CAM 7

CAM 8

CAM 9

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

1ips

Version Info.

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

Main area

Submenu

Maintenance

Event Log

Error Log

SUPER FINE

FINE

Access Log

NORMAL

EXTENDED

Main menu: These menus are always being displayed on the SETUP MENU.

Live image: Live image from the camera channel that was selected just before the SETUP MENU had displayed.

Main area: The setting items of the selected submenu will be displayed in this area.

Submenu: The submenu of the selected main menu will be displayed on the left side of the SETUP MENU. The submenus are

different depending on the selected main menu.

ꢀ Basic Operation with the SETUP MENU

Press the SETUP/ESC button for 2 seconds or more

when displaying live images.

Perform the settings for each setting item.

Item selection: Move the cursor using the arrows but-

ton (A B D C ).

Change the setting: Rotate the jog dial.

[Screenshot 1]

Pop-up display of the setting item: Press the SET but-

ton when the setting item to has the "SETUP" button

next to the setting item name.

Turning pages of the settings menu: When "PREV/

NEXT PAGE" is displayed on the bottom of the set-

tings menu, move the cursor to the "PREV/NEXT

PAGE" using the arrows button, and then use the

arrows button (A B ) to turn the pages.

The top page of the SETUP MENU will be displayed.

SET UP MENU Maintenance Recording

Switcher Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

LIVE

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate Status

Disk Info.

CAM

1ips

Version Info.

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

Maintenance

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

Event Log

Error Log

SUPER FINE

FINE

Selecting a submenu again: Press the SET button.

The cursor will be able to select a submenu again.

Access Log

NORMAL

EXTENDED

Select a main menu using the arrows button and press

the SET button.

After completing the settings, press the SETUP/ESC

button for 2 seconds or more. The SETUP MENU will be

closed.

→ Live image will be displayed again.

[Screenshot 2]

The submenu of the selected main menu will be displayed.

Important:

If the settings are changed, all login users will be force-

fully logged out.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

OFF

All

REC Setup

Recording Action

ꢀꢀ

External Timer

ꢀꢀ

Emergency REC

Manual Recording Channel

ꢀꢀ

Embedded REC(Title)

ꢀꢀ

Embedded REC(Time&Date)

ꢀꢀ

REC Priority

ꢀꢀ

PRIORITY

REC MODE

Manual REC

Event REC

Scheduled REC

Audio Allocation

ꢀꢀ

AUDIO

Audio1

Audio2

Audio3

Audio4

CAMERA

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

OFF

Select the submenu using the arrows button (D C ) and

the press the SET button.

When selecting the submenu by the cursor is enabled,

press the SETUP/ESC button. The main menu will be

enabled to select.

[Screenshot 3]

The setting items will be displayed in the main area and the

cursor will move to a setting item.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

REC Setup

Resolution

FIELD

10s

ꢀꢀ

Recording Time

ꢀꢀ

Emergency REC

Recording Rate and Quality

ꢀꢀ

RATE

3ips

QUALITY

VFA

RATE

3ips

QUALITY

VFA

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM9

VFA CAM10

VFA CAM11

VFA CAM12

VFA CAM13

VFA CAM14

VFA CAM15

VFA CAM16

Auto Copy

ꢀꢀ

OFF

ꢀ Functions for Maintaining (Maintenance)

Perform the settings for the hard disk drives.

It is possible to check the histories (log) of event occur-

rence, error occurrence and access.

Note: The displayed available disk space on this menu

will not include the space required for data man-

agement. Therefore, the undercounted available

disk space will be displayed.

SET UP MENU Maintenance Recording

Switcher Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

LIVE

• Hour meter warning setting

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate Status

Disk Info.

CAM

1ips

Select the duration as the maximum active time of the

hard disk from the followings. Warning will be displayed

when the set time have passed.

Version Info.

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

Maintenance

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

Event Log

Error Log

10 000 H/20 000 H/30 000 H

SUPER FINE

FINE

Access Log

NORMAL

EXTENDED

• HDD safety mode

The HDDs will not start up with the default setting when

installing this unit in the rack without turning the power

of the unit off, to prevent malfunction caused by shock

or vibration.

After completing the installation, set the HDD SAFETY

MODE to OFF. Otherwise, the unit will be unable to

operate when turning the power on after the shutdown

caused by unexpected incident such as power outage.

Refer to page XX for further information.

q [REC Rate Status] Check the

recording rate and the image quality

for each camera channel

Recording rate in each recording mode for each cam-

era (as shown below) will be displayed in list form.

SET UP MENU Maintenance Recording

Switcher Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

LIVE

MANU

AUTO

SCHE PRE EVT POST EVT EMR

REC Rate Status

Disk Info.

CAM

1ips

e [Version Info.] Check the version

Version Info.

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Date Delete

information

Maintenance

CAM 10

CAM 11

CAM 12

CAM 13

CAM 14

CAM 15

CAM 16

Version information of the software and the hardware,

and the MAC address will be displayed.

Event Log

Error Log

SUPER FINE

FINE

Access Log

NORMAL

EXTENDED

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

MANU: Manual recording

SCHE: Scheduled recording

PRE EVT: Pre-event recording

POST EVT: Post-event recording

EMR: Emergency recording

REC Rate Status

Disk Info.

Software

ꢀꢀ

V1.00

AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF

Hardware

ꢀꢀ

Mac Address

ꢀꢀ

Version Info.

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Maintenance

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

w [Disk Info.] Check the available hard

disk space

r [Disk End Mode] Set actions to be

taken when the available hard disk

space has run out

The available hard disk space of the followings will be

displayed: The built-in hard disk (normal recording

area, event recording area and copy area), extension

unit (EXT1 - 7), DVD-RAM, CD-R and DVD-R disk drive

connected to the copy port (COPY1 or COPY2).

Refer to page 29 for detailed built-in hard disk.

It is also possible to perform the settings of the hour-

meter (the active time of the HDD) warning and of the

HDD safety mode with this menu.

Select an action from the followings to be taken when

the available space of the built-in hard disk (normal

recording area, event recording area, copy area) or the

external recording device (DVD-RAM, CD-R or DVD-R

disk drive) connected to the copy port (COPY1,

COPY2) is running out.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

HDD

ꢀꢀ

REC Rate Status

Disk Info.

REC Rate Status

Disk Info.

REMAINING

Normal REC Area 1800GB

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

MAIN

EXT7

EXT6

EXT5

EXT4

EXT3

EXT2

EXT1

• Normal Recording Area

• Event Recording Area

• COPY Area

CONTINUE

STOP

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

120GB

15000h

Event REC Area 1200GB

Version Info.

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Version Info.

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Copy Area

Copy 1

Copy 2

600GB

100GB

STOP

ꢀꢀCOPY1

COPY2

STOP

ꢀꢀ

Maintenance

Event Log

Error Log

Event Log

Error Log

OFF

Warning for Disk Life Time

Power ON Suspend

ꢀꢀ

Access Log

CONTINUE: When the available disk space has run

out, old data will be overwritten by new data. In this

case, the oldest data is the first to be overwritten.

STOP: When the available disk space has run out,

recording and copying will be canceled.

Auto delete function will be not work when OFF is selected.

OFF/1DAY/2DAYS/3DAYS/4DAYS/5DAYS/6DAYS/

7DAYS/8DAYS/9DAYS/10DAYS/14DAYS/30DAYS/45DAYS/

60DAYS/90DAYS/120DAYS/150DAYS/180DAYS

ꢀ Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

By setting time and date, images in the normal recording

area of the hard disk that had been recorded until a day

before the set time and date will be deleted.

t [Disk Capacity] Set actions to be

taken when the available disk space

is riunning out

Enter 4-digit number for year when entering time and date.

Select an action from the followings to be taken when

the available space of the built-in hard disk (normal

recording area, event recording area, copy area) or the

external recording device (DVD-RAM, CD-R or DVD-R

disk drive) connected to the copy port (COPY1,

COPY2) reaches the specified level.

ꢀ Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

By setting time and date, images in the event recording

area of the hard disk that had been recorded until a day

before the set time and date will be deleted.

The setting range is between 1% and 10% (in 1% step).

The warning will not be issued when OFF is selected.

ꢀ Disc Format of DVD

Initialize (format) a DVD-RAM disk in the DVD-RAM drive

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

connected to the copy port.

HDD

ꢀꢀ

REC Rate Status

Disk Info.

• Normal Recording Area

• Event Recording Area

• COPY Area

OFF

Version Info.

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

COPY1

ꢀꢀ

COPY2

ꢀꢀ

Maintenance

u [Maintenance] Replace the hard disk

Event Log

Error Log

drive

Access Log

Use this menu when replacing the hard disk drive.

By following the displayed instructions, it will be possi-

ble to replace the hard disk drive without turning off the

power of the unit.

Refer to page XX for further information about the

replacement of the hard disk.

Important:

When "CONTINUE" is selected for "Disk End Mode",

warning will not be issued.

y [Data Delete] Delete image data on

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

the hard disk

No.

Time&Date

Event

REC Rate Status

Disk Info.

999999999 MAR.25.03 11:50:11 PM

999999998 MAR.25.03 11:49:22 PM

999999997 MAR.25.03 11:39:21 PM

999999996 MAR.25.03 11:33:22 PM

999999995 MAR.25.03 11:30:26 PM

999999994 MAR.25.03 11:24:11 PM

999999993 MAR.25.03 11:20:11 PM

999999992 MAR.25.03 11:11:11 PM

999999991 MAR.25.03 11:10:31 PM

999999990 MAR.25.03 11:09:28 PM

999999989 MAR.25.03 11:04:52 PM

999999988 MAR.25.03 10:59:12 PM

999999987 MAR.25.03 10:51:00 PM

999999986 MAR.25.03 10:43:54 PM

999999985 MAR.25.03 10:37:59 PM

999999984 MAR.25.03 10:35:13 PM

999999983 MAR.25.03 10:24:03 PM

999999982 MAR.25.03 10:06:42 PM

999999981 MAR.25.03 09:58:29 PM

999999980 MAR.25.03 09:24:14 PM

LOSS16

TRM-1

VMD-14

EMR

COM-13

LOSS-15

TRM-12

VMD-4

EMR

COM-8

LOSS-16

TRM-1

VMD-14

EMR

COM-13

LOSS-15

TRM-12

VMD-4

EMR

Version Info.

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Delete image data on the built-in hard disk.

Auto deletion and manual deletion are available to

delete image data.

It is also possible to initialize (format) a DVD-RAM disk

with this menu.

Maintenance

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

COM-8

PREV/NEXT PAGE

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Auto Delete

ꢀꢀ

REC Rate Status

Disk Info.

OFF

Manual Delete for Normal Recording Area

ꢀꢀ

Delete before JAN

DELETE

Manual Delete for Event Recording Area

Version Info.

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

S ET U P

EN U

メンテナンス

スイッチャ

録

表

画

示

イベント動作スケジュール

ꢀꢀ

Disc Format of DVD

LIV E

通

信

システム

実行

Delete before JAN

DELETE

ꢀꢀ

■ディスクメンテナンスモード

■R A ID ユニットディスク交換

録画レート一覧

ディスク情報

バージョン情報

終端設定

COPY1

FORMAT

1 . 障害発生ユニットの設置／運用モード

スイッチを「設置」に切り替えてくだ

さい

COPY2

Maintenance

Event Log

Error Log

2 . ディスクを交換してください

残容量警告

3 . 設置／運用モードスイッチを「運用」

に切り替えてください

Access Log

データ消去

4 . リカバースイッチを押しながらハード

リセットスイッチを押してください

ディスクメンテナンス

5 . 本体前面［セット］キーを押してくだ

さい

イベント入力ログ

障害ログ

アクセスログ

ꢀ Auto Delete

It is possible to delete recorded images automatically when

the set days have passed from the day the image was

recorded. Refer to a system administrator for further infor-

mation.

Available days for the auto delete function are as follows.

i [Event Log] Check the event log

o [Error Log] Check the error log

Event log (time and date at an event occurrence,

details) will be displayed in list form.

Refer to page XX for further information about each

event.

Error log will be displayed in list form.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

No.

Time&Date

Event

REC Rate Status

Disk Info.

99 MAR.25.03 11:50:11 PM H.METER MAIN1-1

98 MAR.25.03 11:49:22 PM AL 1-0312312359

97 MAR.25.03 11:39:21 PM R-ERR EXT1-2

96 MAR.25.03 11:33:22 PM CAM LOSS1

95 MAR.25.03 11:30:26 PM PWR RECOVER

94 MAR.25.03 11:24:11 PM H.METER MAIN1-1

93 MAR.25.03 11:20:11 PM AL1-0312312359

92 MAR.25.03 11:11:11 PM R-ERR EXT1-2

91 MAR.25.03 11:10:31 PM CAM LOSS1

90 MAR.25.03 11:09:28 PM PWR RECOVER

89 MAR.25.03 11:04:52 PM H.METER MAIN1-1

88 MAR.25.03 10:59:12 PM AL1-0312312359

87 MAR.25.03 10:51:00 PM R-ERR EXT1-2

86 MAR.25.03 10:43:54 PM COM LOSS1

85 MAR.25.03 10:37:59 PM PWR RECOVER

84 MAR.25.03 10:35:13 PM H.METER MAIN1-1

83 MAR.25.03 10:24:03 PM AL1-0312312359

82 MAR.25.03 10:06:42 PM R-ERR EXT1-2

81 MAR.25.03 09:58:29 PM COM LOSS1

80 MAR.25.03 09:24:14 PM PWR RECOVER

Version Info.

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

No.

Time&Date

Event

Maintenance

REC Rate Status

Disk Info.

999999999 MAR.25.03 11:50:11 PM

999999998 MAR.25.03 11:49:22 PM

999999997 MAR.25.03 11:39:21 PM

999999996 MAR.25.03 11:33:22 PM

999999995 MAR.25.03 11:30:26 PM

999999994 MAR.25.03 11:24:11 PM

999999993 MAR.25.03 11:20:11 PM

999999992 MAR.25.03 11:11:11 PM

999999991 MAR.25.03 11:10:31 PM

999999990 MAR.25.03 11:09:28 PM

999999989 MAR.25.03 11:04:52 PM

999999988 MAR.25.03 10:59:12 PM

999999987 MAR.25.03 10:51:00 PM

999999986 MAR.25.03 10:43:54 PM

999999985 MAR.25.03 10:37:59 PM

999999984 MAR.25.03 10:35:13 PM

999999983 MAR.25.03 10:24:03 PM

999999982 MAR.25.03 10:06:42 PM

999999981 MAR.25.03 09:58:29 PM

999999980 MAR.25.03 09:24:14 PM

LOSS16

TRM-1

VMD-14

EMR

COM-13

LOSS-15

TRM-12

VMD-4

EMR

COM-8

LOSS-16

TRM-1

VMD-14

EMR

COM-13

LOSS-15

TRM-12

VMD-4

EMR

Event Log

Error Log

Version Info.

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Access Log

PREV/NEXT PAGE

Maintenance

Event Log

Error Log

Access Log

Note: Up to 100 error logs can be kept. When more

than 100 error logs are filed, old error log will be

overwritten by new error log. In this case, the oldest

log is the first to be overwritten.

COM-8

PREV/NEXT PAGE

COM: Command alarm

EMR: Emergency recording

LOSS: Video loss

TRM: Terminal alarm

VMD: Motion detection

Note: Up to 750 event logs can be kept. When more

than 750 event logs are filed, old event log will be

overwritten by new event log. In this case, the old-

est log is the first to be overwritten.

Indication

AL*-YYMMDDhhmmss

Description

Asterisk (*) indicates camera channel

Cause

Detects alateration

number

YYDDMMhhmmss indicates the played

time when alteration had been detect-

ed.

W-ERR X-Y

X indicates the unit/unit number that

has the errored hard disk

Y indicates the disk number in the unit

(unit number)

Failed to write data on the HDD

Auto removal of the link

REMOVE X-Y

X indicates the unit/unit number that

has the hard disk that is removed from

the subject for recording.

Y indicates the disk number in the

unit/unit number

#-FULL

# indicates the partition name/external

recording device port number

No available disk space

Thermal error

THERMAL -X

FAN X-Y

X indicates the unit/unit number in

which the thermal error occurred

X indicates the unit/unit number

Y indicates the fan number (1-4)

Y will be left out if the nalfunctioning fan

is of the extension unit

The fan is makfunctioning

Indication

Description

Cause

#-nn%

# indicates the partition name of the

hard disk/external recording device

nn indicates the available disk space

Warning for the disk space running out

SMART X-Y

X indicates the unit/unit number that

has the errored hard disk

HDD SMART error

Y indicates the unit/unit number

PWR LOSS

Detects the power outage

Hour-meter warning

H.METER X-Y

X indicates the unit/unit number that

has the errored hard disk

Y indicates the unit/unit number

PROTECT -#

NO DISK -#

# indicates the external

Disk has the write protection

Disk is not inserted

# indicates port number to which the

external recording device connected

MEDIUM -#

# indicates port number to which the

external recording device connected

Incompatibel disk

UNFORMATTED -#

PWR RECOVER

# indicates port number to which the

external recording device connected

Unformatted disk

# indicates port number to which the

external recording device connected

Recover form the power outage

Note: Up to 100 access logs can be kept. When more

than 100 access logs are filed, old access log will

be overwritten by new access log. In this case, the

oldest log is the first to be overwritten.

! [Access Log] Chack the access log

The time, user name and IP addresses when logging

in/out to/from this unit will be displayed in list form.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

REC Rate Status

Disk Info.

No.

Time&Date

Event

99 MAR.25.03 11:50:11 PM 192.168.100.100 IN

98 MAR.25.03 11:49:22 PM 1234567890123456789012345678901 OUT

97 MAR.25.03 11:39:21 PM tshimi IN

Version Info.

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

96 MAR.25.03 11:33:22 PM tshimi OUT

95 MAR.25.03 11:30:26 PM 123.123.123.123 OUT

94 MAR.25.03 11:24:00 PM 192.168.100.100 IN

93 MAR.25.03 11:20:11 PM 1234567890123456789012345678901 OUT

92 MAR.25.03 11:11:23 PM tshimi IN

91 MAR.25.03 11:10:31 PM tshimi OUT

90 MAR.25.03 11:09:28 PM 123.123.123.123 OUT

89 MAR.25.03 11:04:52 PM 192.168 100.100 IN

88 MAR.25.03 10:59:12 PM 1234567890123456789012345678901 OUT

87 MAR.25.03 10:51:11 PM tshimi IN

Maintenance

86 MAR.25.03 10:43:54 PM tshimi OUT

85 MAR.25.03 10:37:59 PM 123.123.123.123 OUT

84 MAR.25.03 10:35:13 PM 192.168.100.100 IN

83 MAR.25.03 10:24:03 PM 1234567890123456789012345678901 OUT

82 MAR.25.03 10:06:42 PM tshimi IN

Event Log

Error Log

81 MAR.25.03 09:58:29 PM tshimi OUT

80 MAR.25.03 09:24:14 PM 123.123.123.123 OUT

Access Log

PREV/NEXT PAGE

**IN: The user name or the IP address displayed before

IN indicates the user/host logged in.

**OUT: The user name or the IP address displayed

before OUT indicates the user/host logged out.

**: User name or host name

ꢀ [Recording]

Perform the settings for the basic recording (REC Setup)

and the emergency recording.

• [Manual Recording Channel]

Select a camera channel for manual recording from the

followings. Refer to page xx for manual recording.

MON2: Images from the camera channel currently dis-

played on the monitor 2 will be recorded.

ALL: Images from all the camera channels will be

recorded.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Recording Action

External Timer

Manual Recording Chanel

Embedded REC(Title)

ꢀ Embedded REC(Time & Date)

REC Priority

Event Setup

VMD Setup

ꢀ

OFF

All

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

ꢀ

PRIORITY

REC MODE

Manual REC

Event REC

Scheduleed REC

Audio Allocation

ꢀ

AUDIO

CAMERA

CAM 1

CAM 2

CAM 3

CAM 4

Important:

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

AUDIO 4

Even though "MON2" is selected, images from all the

camera channels will be recorded while the sequential

display or when live image is not displayed on the mon-

itor 2.

When "MON2" is selected, images from a camera chan-

nel for other manual recording that is started later will

be recorded regardless of the operation using the but-

tons on the front panel or via a network.

q [REC Setup] Perform the recording

for the basic recording.

Perform the following settings for the basic recording.

• [Embedded REC (Title)]

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Select ON or OFF to determine whether to record a dis-

played camera title together as a part of the recorded

image or not.

ON: Record camera titles together as a part of the

recorded image.

Recording Action

External Timer

Manual Recording Chanel

Embedded REC(Title)

ꢀ Embedded REC(Time & Date)

REC Priority

Event Setup

VMD Setup

ꢀ

OFF

All

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

ꢀ

PRIORITY

REC MODE

Manual REC

Event REC

Scheduleed REC

Audio Allocation

ꢀ

AUDIO

CAMERA

CAM 1

CAM 2

CAM 3

CAM 4

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

AUDIO 4

OFF: Does not record camera titles.

• [Embedded REC (Time & Date)]

• Recording Action

Select ON or OFF to determine whether to record dis-

played time and date together or not.

ON: Record time and date together as a part of the

recorded image.

Select ON or OFF to record or not record.

ON: Recording will be performed.

No recording will be performed.

OFF: Does not record time and date.

Important:

When OFF is selected for this setting, no recordings will

be performed. Select ON for normal use except when

required to stop recording forcefully such as when trou-

ble occurred with the unit.

Important:

It is possible to select ON or OFF to determine whether

to display the camera title or the time and date record-

ed together with the images even though OFF is select-

ed for "Embedded". (Refer to page XX.)

When ON is selected for "Embedded", it is impossible to

hide the camera title and the time and date. (Refer to

page xx.)

• [External Timer]

Select ON or OFF to determine whether to start record-

ing when the power is turned on by the connected

external timer (or the switch) or not.

ON: Manual recording will start automatically after com-

pleting the system check.

OFF: Manual recording will not start automatically after

completing the system check.

• [REC Priority]

Assigns priorities to recording modes. Assigns priorities

1 (highest) - 3 (lowest) to each recording mode.

Refer to page xx for further information about each

recording mode.

Important:

When ON is selected, manual recording will start auto-

matically after completing the system check.

• [Audio Allocation]

Allocates audio from the audio input connectors (1 - 4)

on the rear panel of the unit to camera channels.

Allocate audio in accordance with channels of connect-

ed cameras. When OFF is selected, audio will not be

heard.

Set to ON except when required to stop recording

forcefully such as when the unit is malfunctioning.

Important:

• When a live image from the audio assigned camera

channel is displayed on a single screen on the monitor

2, audio will be heard. When displaying on a multi-

screen, audio will not be heard.

• When images from the audio assigned camera channel

are displayed on a single screen, recorded audio will

be heard. When displaying on a multiscreen, recorded

audio will not be heard.

• When OFF is selected for a specified camera channel,

images from a camera channel set to OFF will not be

recorded.

• When "FRAME 3D ON" or "FRAME 3D OFF" is selected,

the total recording rates of CAM 1 - CAM 16 (for WJ-

HD316) must be less than 30 ips.

• When "FIELD" is selected, the total recording rates of

CAM 1 - CAM 16 (for WJ-HD316) must be less than 60

ips.

• When "SIF" is selected, the total recording rates of CAM

1 - CAM 16 (for WJ-HD316) must be less than 120 ips.

• When "FRAME 3D ON", "FRAME 3D OFF" or "SIF" is

selected, it is impossible to select 60 ips.

• Audio will be recorded regardless of displaying on a

single screen or a multi-screen.

w [Emergency REC] Perform the

settings for emergency recording

The following are available for image quality.

SFA/SFB: Top quality (SUPER FINE)

FQA/FQB: High quality (FINE)

NQA/NQB: Standard quality (NORMAL)

EXA/EXB: Low quality (EXTENDED)

Perform the settings for emergency recording such as

recording time or recording rate for emergency record-

ing.

Refer to page xx for further information about emer-

gency recording.

**A is suitable for less dynamic images.

**B is suitable for more dynamic images.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

REC Setup

Resolution

FIELD

10s

ꢀꢀ

Recording Time

ꢀꢀ

Emergency REC

•

[Auto Copy]

Recording Rate and Quality

ꢀꢀ

RATE

3ips

QUALITY

VFA

RATE

3ips

QUALITY

Select ON or OFF to set whether or not to automatically

copy images recorded by emergency recording onto

the copy area on the built-in hard disk or DVD-RAM

disk.

VFA

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM9

VFA CAM10

VFA CAM11

VFA CAM12

VFA CAM13

VFA CAM14

VFA CAM15

VFA CAM16

Auto Copy

ꢀꢀ

OFF

Important:

When OFF is selected for "Auto Copy" on "Basic setup"

• Resolution

Select a recording resolution from the following.

FRAME 3D ON: High resolution (720 x 480), with cam-

era shake compensation

FRAME 3D OFF: High resolution (720 x 480)

FIELD: Standard resolution (720 x 240)

SIF: Low resolution (360 x 240)

of "System", the auto copy function will not work after

emergency recording even though ON is selected for

this setting. Select "HDD", "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" for

"Auto Copy".

• Recording Time

Perform the settings of recording time and recording

action for emergency recording.

The following are available for recording time.

1 s - 10 s (in 1 second intervals)

20 s/30 s

1 m - 10 m (in 1 minute intervals)

20 m/30 m/40 m/50 m/60 m

MANUAL: Recording will continue while the external

switch is being held down.

CONTINUE: Recording will not stop until the [ALARM

RESET] button on the front panel of the unit is

pressed.

• [Recording Rate and Quality]

Perform the settings of recording rate and image quality

for emergency recording.

The following are available for recording rate.

OFF/1 ips/2 ips/3 ips/5 ips/6 ips/7.5 ips/10 ips/15 ips/30

ips/60 ips

ꢀ [Event] Function for Events

Perform the settings for event actions of each event type

(motion detection, video loss, command alarm and terminal

alarm).

The following are available for buzzer sound duration.

When OFF is selected, a buzzer will not sound.

(s: second, m: minute)

OFF: The buzzer will not sound.

1 s - 30 s (in 1 second intervals)

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

/40 s/50 s/1 m/2 m/3 m/4 m/5 m

EXT: The buzzer will continue until the [ALARM RESET]

button is pressed.

Event Setup

VMD Setup

VMD

ꢀꢀ

SETUP

Video Loss Setup

ꢀꢀ

Terminal Command Alarm

ꢀꢀ

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

w [VMD Setup] Perform the settings for

the motion detection function

Select ON or OFF to determine whether to enable or

disable the motion detection function for each camera

channel.

When ON is selected, perform the settings for the auto

motion detection area for each camera channel. Up to 4

areas can be set for a camera channel for the detection

area. Refer to page xx for further information about the

auto motion detection function.

q [Event Setup] Settings for the alarm

output duration and the buzzer

duration

Perform the settings for alarm output duration and

buzzer sound duration for each event type (motion

detection, video loss, command alarm and terminal

alarm).

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

SETUP

CAM1

ꢀꢀ

Event Setup

VMD Setup

CAM2

ꢀꢀ

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

CAM3

ꢀꢀ

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

CAM4

ꢀꢀ

CAM5

ꢀꢀ

Recording Action

External Timer

Manual Recording Chanel

Embedded REC(Title)

ꢀ Embedded REC(Time & Date)

REC Priority

Event Setup

VMD Setup

ꢀ

OFF

All

CAM6

ꢀꢀ

CAM7

ꢀꢀ

CAM8

ꢀꢀ

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

CAM9

ꢀꢀ

CAM10

ꢀꢀ

ꢀ

PRIORITY

REC MODE

Manual REC

Event REC

CAM11

ꢀꢀ

CAM12

ꢀꢀ

CAM13

ꢀꢀ

Scheduleed REC

CAM14

ꢀꢀ

Audio Allocation

ꢀ

CAM15

ꢀꢀ

AUDIO

CAMERA

CAM 1

CAM 2

CAM 3

CAM 4

CAM16

ꢀꢀ

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

AUDIO 3

AUDIO 4

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

SETUP MENU

LIVE

System

Event Setup

VMD Setup

VMD

ꢀꢀ

SETUP

Video Loss Setup

ꢀꢀ

Terminal/Command Alarm Setup

ꢀꢀ

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

Alarm Output

ꢀꢀ

1 0 s

Buzzer

ꢀꢀ

O K

CANCEL

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the camera channel selection menu of

the "VMD Setup" window.

The following are available for alarm output duration.

When OFF is selected, alarm output will not be sup-

plied.

(s: second, m: minute)

OFF: No alarm output is supplied.

1 s - 30 s (in 1 second intervals)

/40 s/50 s/1 m/2 m/3 m/4 m/5 m

EXT: Alarm output will continue until the [ALARM

RESET] button is pressed.

Important:

Alarm output duration cannot be set for video loss.

Signals will be supplied continuously from the camera

error output terminal on the rear panel during the period

when the video signal is lost. (Refer to page xx.)

Rotate the jog dial to select ON for a desired camera

channel to which the motion detection function to be

applied, and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 2]

[Screenshot 5]

The "VMD Setup" window will be displayed.

The motion detection area is set with the start point and the

end point as the points at opposite angles of the motion

detection area.

Rotate the jog dial to select "SETUP AREA" on the status

bar.

Note: To set all areas on the monitor as the motion

detection area, select "ALL AREA" and press the

SET button.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 to set another motion detection

area.

Up to 4 areas can be set. Created areas will be named

automatically as A, B, C and D in the created order.

[Screenshot 3]

To complete the settings, rotate the jog dial to select

"EXIT" on the status bar, and press the SET button.

→ The "VMD Setup" window will be closed.

The cross cursor will be displayed on the "VMD Setup" win-

dow.

ꢀ Delete the motion detection area

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "VMD Setup" window.

Move the cross cursor to a desired point to be set as

the start point of the motion detection area using the

arrows button, and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 4]

The start point of the motion detection area is allocated.

Rotate the jog dial to select "DELETE AREA" on the sta-

tus bar.

Note: After selecting "DELETE ALL AREA", pressing the

SET button will delete all of the motion detection

area.

[Screenshot 2]

The cross cursor will be displayed on the "VMD Setup" win-

dow.

Move the cross cursor to a desired point to be set as

the end point of the motion detection area using the

arrows button, and press the SET button.

Move the cross cursor onto an area to be deleted using

the arrows button and press the SET button.

ꢀ Set the detection mode

Perform the settings of the detection mode (method of

detection) in the set detection area. Specifying a method of

detection in a detection area is available by the setting

detection mode.

To complete the settings, rotate the jog dial to select

"EXIT" on the status bar.

→ The "VMD Setup" window will be closed.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "VMD Setup" window.

ꢀ Set the sensitivity

Set the sensitivity for the created motion detection area.

Sensitivity can be set for each area.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "VMD Setup" window.

Rotate the jog dial to select "VMD MODE" on the status

bar.

[Screenshot 2]

The detection mode menu will be displayed.

Rotate the jog dial to select "SENSITIVITY" on the status

bar.

[Screenshot 2]

The cross cursor will be displayed on the "VMD Setup" win-

dow.

Set the detection mode.

Move the cursor to a desired detection mode using the

arrows button (A B ).

Check the radio button next to a desired detection

mode using the arrows button (D C ) and pressing the

SET button.

Refer to the following for further information about each

of the detection mode.

Move the cross cursor to select an area using the

arrows button (A B ).

An event action will be performed according to the set-

Select the sensitivity for the selected area from the fol-

lowing.

OFF: No motion will be detected in this area.

LOW: Low sensitivity

tings when "motion" is detected in any of the set motion

detection areas.

MID: Standard sensitivity

Move the cursor to an area for the settings of VECTOR

using the arrows button (C ) and rotate the jog dial to

select an area. Move the cursor to the parameter box of

the selected area using the arrows button (B ) to select

an interval time for an object moving between each

area from the following.

HIGH: High sensitivity

To complete the settings, rotate the jog dial to select

"EXIT" on the status bar, and press the SET button.

→ The "VMD Setup" window will be closed.

--/5 s/10 s/20 s/30 s/40 s/50 s/1 m(min)

Move the cursor to a parameter box of each area using

Motion is detected in area C within 20 seconds after

being detected in area B.

the arrows button (B ) and rotate the jog dial to select a

moving duration for an object in each area from the fol-

lowing.

Motion is detected in area D within 10 seconds after

being detected in area C.

When all of the above have occurred, an event action

will be performed.

--/5 s/10 s/20 s/30 s/40 s/50 s/1 m

To complete the settings, rotate the jog dial to select

"EXIT" on the status bar, and press the SET button.

→ The "VMD Setup" window will be closed.

<DURATION (to detect object keeps on moving in the

area)>

An event action will be performed according to the set-

tings when an object keeps on moving for the set peri-

od in the detection area. For example, in case of the fol-

lowing settings; 10 sec. for the area A and B, 20 sec.

for area C and 30 sec. for area D:

ꢀ About the Detection mode

Perform the settings of the detection mode (method of

detection) in the set detection area. Specifying a method of

detection in a detection area is available by the setting

detection mode.

An event action will be performed when an object

keeps on moving for 10 seconds in area A or B, or for

20 seconds in area C, or for 30 seconds in area D.

There are three detection modes as follows.

Important:

Activating two or more detection modes simultaneously

is not possible.

An event action will be performed according to the set-

tings when "motion" is detected in any of the set motion

detection areas.

e [Alarm Setup] Perform the settings

for alarm auto reset and alarm

disarm

Perform the settings for the alarm displaying duration.

The alarm display will automatically disappear when the

displaying duration has passed. (Alarm Auto Reset)

Perform the settings to suspend the set duration when

the same type of the event (motion detection, video

loss, terminal alarm, command alarm) has occurred

sequentially so that the event action will not be per-

formed each time. (Alarm Disarm)

Any motion will be detected anywhere in the A, B, C, D

areas.

<VECTOR (to detect object moving to a certain direc-

tion)>

An event action will be performed according to the set-

tings when an object moves within the set time to the

other detection area in the set order.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Event Setup

VMD Setup

Alarm Auto Reset

OFF

ꢀꢀ

Alarm Disarm Time

ꢀꢀ

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

10 sec.

The following is an example.

Motion is detected in area B within 10 seconds after

being detected in area A.

ꢀ [Alarm Auto Reset]

The following are possible for the alarm auto reset.

When OFF is selected, the alarm display will not automati-

cally disappear.

To erase the alarm display, press the ALARM RESET but-

ton.

OFF/1 s - 30 s (in 1 second intervals)

40 s/50 s/1 m/2 m/3 m4 m/5 m

ꢀ [Alarm Disarm]

The following are possible for the alarm disarm.

2 s - 10 s (in 1 second intervals)

r [Terminal Setup] Perform the

settings for the alarm terminal

polarity.

Select how to supply the signal to the alarm terminal.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Event Setup

VMD Setup

Teerminal Setup

ꢀꢀ

N.O.

Alarm Setup

Terminal Setup

N.O.: Signals will be supplied when short-circuited.

(Normally Open)

N.C.: Signals will be supplied when open-circuited.

(Normally Closed)

Note: It is possible to set polarities for each of the alarm

inputs 1-16 respectively using a PC via the network.

ꢀ [Schedule] Perform the settings for the recording/event action schedule

Perform the settings for the recording schedules of record-

ing and event action by designating a day of the week and

time.

ꢀ [Resolution]

Select a resolution for images to be recorded from the fol-

lowing.

A day can be divided into up to 6 time zones, and record-

FRAME 3D ON: High resolution (720 x 480) with the motion

ing programs and event action programs can be assigned

blur compensation

to each time zone to create a recording schedule.

FRAME 3D OFF: High resolution (720 x 480)

FIELD: Standard resolution (720 x 480)

SIF: Low resolution (360 x 240)

Up to 4 normal recording programs (REC Prog) and up to 4

event action programs (Event Prog) can be created.

Perform the settings for the REC Prog: resolution and

recording rate. Perform the settings for the Event Prog:

Note: When "FRAME 3D ON" is selected, it is possible to

action mode for each event type and auto copy.

record moving object with a few blurring.

It is possible to create special days apart from the normal

schedule, and a recording program of another day of the

week can be switched to a special days program automati-

ꢀ Recording Rate for Each Recording Mode

cally.

Perform the settings of recording rate for each recording

mode (manual recording, scheduled recording and event

recording).

Assign the maximum recording rate according to the reso-

Flowchart how to create a schedule

Follow the procedures below to create schedules.

lution to each recording mode.

The following are the maximum recording rate for each res-

Create REC Prog/Event Prog. (aPage xx and xx)

olution.

Create a timetable. (aPage xx)

Resolution

FRAME 3D ON

FRAME 3D OFF

FIELD

Maximum recording rate

30 ips

60 ips

120 ips

Assign REC Prog/Event Prog to a timetable.

(aPage xx)

SIF

The following are available for the recording rate for each

q [REC Program] Create a recording

resolution.

OFF/2 ips/3 ips/5 ips/6 ips/7.5 ips/10 ips/15 ips/30 ips/60

ips/120 ips

program

Perform the settings of resolution, and recording rate for

each recording mode, and the recording rate and

image quality of each camera channel. Up to 4 record-

ing programs can be created.

Important:

• When "FRAME" is selected for "Resolution", "60 ips" and

"120 ips" are not available. When "FIELD" is selected,

"120 ips" is not available.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

• The total recording rates for each recording mode must

be less than the maximum recording rate of each reso-

lution.

LIVE

SETUP

Recording Program 1

ꢀꢀ

Time Table

REC Prog

Recording Program 2

ꢀꢀ

Recording Program 3

ꢀꢀ

Event Prog

Special Days

Recording Program 4

ꢀꢀ

Examples: When "FIELD" is selected and set the total

recording rates for each recording mode less than

60 ips.

Manual recording: 15 ips

Scheduled recording: 15 ips

Event recording: 30 ips

Recording Program 1

Maintenance

Shedule

System

SETUP MENU

Resolution

^RecordingFIELD^Event

Communication

ꢀꢀ

LIVE

Switcher

Display

Recording Table

ꢀꢀRecording Rate and Image Quality for Each

ꢀꢀ

Manual REC 15 ₁ip_2As_MSchedule REC 15 ₁i₂p_Ps_MEvent ₆R_PE_MC 30 ips

6AM

EVENT(PRE)

RATE QUALITY RATE QUALITY RATE QUALITY

12AM

Time Table

REC Prog

MANUAL

SCHEDULE

EVENT(POST)

MON

TIME RATE QUALITY TIME

Camera Channel

CAM1

CAM2

Event Prog

CAM3

AUTO

VFA

1ips

VFA

1ips

VFA

1ips

VFA

30s

TUE

VFA

WED

Special Days

CAM4

VFA

Perform the settings for recording rate, image quality and

recording duration for each camera channel (only for event

pre-recording and event post-recording).

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

VFA

THU

VFA

FRI

VFA

SAT

VFA

SUN

VFA

EVERY

VFA

EXT.

Perform the settings for each recording mode. Assign the

recording rate for each camera channel as described in

"Recording Rate for Each Recording Mode" above.

VFA

P2 P3

CANCEL

^EVTO K ^P1

REC

The following are for the recording rate. When OFF is

selected, images from the selected camera channel will not

be recorded.

w [Event Prog] Create event programs

for an event occurrence

OFF/0.1 ips/0.2 ips/0.3 ips/0.4 ips/0.5 ips/1 ips/2 ips/3 ips/5

ips/6 ips/7.5 ips/10 ips/15 ips/30 ips/60 ips

AUTO: Recording rate will be set automatically. (Not possi-

ble for event pre-recording and event post-recording)

Perform the settings of event action for each event type

(motion detection, video loss, terminal/command alarm)

or of auto copy.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Important:

SETUP

Event Program 1

ꢀꢀ

Time Table

REC Prog

Event Program 2

ꢀꢀ

The total recording rates of each camera channels in the

same recording mode must be less than the recording rate

as described in "Recording Rate for Each Recording Mode"

above.

Event Program 3

ꢀꢀ

Event Prog

Special Days

Event Program 4

ꢀꢀ

Examples: When selecting "FIELD" for resolution, "15 ips" for

manual recording, "15 ips" for scheduled recording, "30 ips"

for event recording:

Total recording rates of CAM 1 - 16 (manual recording):

less than 15 ips

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Total recording rates of CAM 1 - 16 (scheduled recording):

less than 15 ips

Total recording rates of CAM 1 - 16 (event recording): less

than 30 ips

SETUP

Event Program 1

ꢀꢀ

Time Table

REC Prog

Event Program 2

ꢀꢀ

Event Program 3

ꢀꢀ

Event Prog

Special Days

Event Action 4

ꢀꢀ

Event PROG1

SETUP

VMD

ꢀꢀ

Video Loss

SETUP

ꢀꢀ

Terminal/Command Alarm

ꢀꢀ

O K

CANCEL

When the total recording rates becomes more than the set

value, the recording mode table will turn red.

Recording mode table

ꢀꢀVMD

Perform the settings of event action at a motion detection or

the settings of the auto copy function.

The larger total recording rates between recording rates of

event pre-recording and recording rates of event post-

recording for each camera channel must be less than the

recording rate as described in "Recording Rate for Each

Recording Mode" above.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

SETUP

Event Program 1

ꢀꢀ

Time Table

REC Prog

Event Program 2

ꢀꢀ

Event Program 3

ꢀꢀ

EVT Prog

Event Program 4

ꢀꢀ

VMD

Special Days

Action Mode

ꢀꢀ

ALM

OFF

Auto Copy

ꢀꢀ

The following are available for image quality.

SFA/SFB: Top quality (SUPER FINE)

FQA/FQB: High quality (FINE)

CANCEL

NQA/NQB: Standard quality (NORMAL)

EXA/EXB: Low quality (EXTENDED)

**A is suitable for less dynamic images.

**B is suitable for more dynamic images.

Perform the settings for the following action mode. Refer to

page xx for further information about each action mode.

The following are available for recording duration (only

event pre-recording and event post-recording).

1 s - 10 s (in 1 second intervals)

20 s/30 s/1 - 10 m (in 1 minute intervals)

20 - 60 m (in 10 minutes intervals)

ADM (Activity Detection Mode): Performs only recording,

writing an event log and camera movement to a preset

position at an event occurrence. Other event actions

will not be performed.

ALM (Alarm Mode): Performs every event action according

to the settings.

MANUAL: Recording duration will be as follows depending

on the event type.

• At a motion detection: For 8 seconds

• At a video loss occurrence: During a video loss occur-

rence

• At a terminal alarm occurrence: During the supply of a

signal

• At a command alarm: For 8 seconds

CONTINUE: Recording will be performed continuously

until the [ALARM RESET] button is pressed.

Auto copy is the function to copy recorded images auto-

matically onto the copy area of the hard disk or the DVD-

RAM disk.

Select ON or OFF to enable or disable the auto copy func-

tion.

ON: Enable the auto copy function

OFF: Disable the auto copy function

Note: When "OFF" is selected for "Auto Copy" of "Basic

Setup" on "System", the auto copy function will not work

even though "ON" is selected for this setting.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation after displayed the timetable window.

Select "HDD", "COPY 1" or "COPY 2" for "Auto Copy".

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

12AM

6AM

12PM

6PM

12AM

Time Table

REC Prog

MON

TUE

WED

THU

FRI

Event Prog

Special Days

ꢀꢀVideo Loss

Perform the settings of event action at a video loss or the

settings of the auto copy function.

The contents to be set are same as the settings for "VMD"

above.

SAT

SUN

EVERY

EXT.

EVT

REC

Press the SET button.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

SETUP

Event Program 1

ꢀꢀ

Time Table

REC Prog

Event Program 2

ꢀꢀ

[Screenshot 2]

Event Program 3

ꢀꢀ

Event Prog

Special Days

Event Program 4

ꢀꢀ

Video Loss

Action Mode

ꢀꢀ

ALM

OFF

Auto Copy

ꢀꢀ

The pop-up setting menu of the timetable for every day of

the week will be displayed.

CANCEL

The cursor will be displayed and will move to "MON"

(Monday).

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

12AM

6AM

12PM

6PM

12AM

Time Table

REC Prog

MON

TUE

WED

THU

FRI

ꢀꢀTerminal/command alarm

Event Prog

Special Days

Perform the settings of event action at a terminal/command

alarm occurrence or the settings of the auto copy function.

The contents to be set are same as the settings for "VMD"

above.

SAT

SUN

EVERY

EXT.

EVT

REC

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Select a day of the week using the arrows button (D C )

and press the [SET] button.

Note: When a signal is supplied from the ALARM/CON-

SETUP

Event Program 1

ꢀꢀ

Time Table

REC Prog

Event Program 2

ꢀꢀ

Event Program 3

ꢀꢀ

Event Prog

Special Days

ꢀꢀ

TermEvineanlt/CPoromgmraamnd4Alarm

Action Mode

ꢀꢀ

ALM

OFF

Auto Copy

ꢀꢀ

TROL

connector

external

recording

CANCEL

changeover), the unit will work with the set timetable

for "EXT."

[Screenshot 3]

e [Time Table] Assignment of REC

Prog and Event Prog after setting the

time zone

The pop-up setting menu of the timetable for the selected

day of the week will be displayed.

Maintenance

Recording

Event

Schedule

SETUP MENU

LIVE

12AM

6AM

12PM

6PM

Switcher

REC

Display

Com

System

Create recording timetables for each day of the week,

and assign REC Prog and Event Prog to each

timetable. Up to 6 recording programs can be created.

MON

EVT

Time Table

REC Prog

REC

EVT

TUE

Time Table (MON)

Copy the other Time Table

TUE

ꢀ

ꢀ ^REC

WED

EVT

ꢀ

REC

Weekday Time Table

ꢀ

Event Prog

Special Days

THU

Period 1

EVT

00 AM

00 PM

00 AM

REC

Period 2

00 PM

00 AM

FRI

EVT

Period 3

REC

SAT

SUN

EVERY

EXT.

EVT

Period 4

REC

P^EVe^Triod 5

REC

Period 6

EVT

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

REC

EVT

O K

CANCEL

LIVE

12AM

6AM

12PM

6PM

12AM

Time Table

REC Prog

MON

TUE

WED

THU

FRI

EVT

REC

Event Prog

Special Days

Select "Weekday Time Table" using the arrows button

(D C ) and rotate the jog dial to check the checkbox.

SAT

SUN

EVERY

EXT.

EVT

REC

Do the followings to create timetables.

100

Rotate the jog dial to select a desired REC Prog/Event

Prog.

(Rotating the jog dial changes the displayed REC

Prog.)

REC Prog will be displayed with different colors.

Orange: REC Prog 1/Event Prog 1

Yellow: REC Prog 2/Event Prog 2

Pale purple: REC Prog 3/Event Prog 3

Indigo blue: REC Prog 4/Event Prog 4

[Screenshot 4]

The checkbox for "Weekday Time Table" is checked.

Time Table (MON)

Copy the other Time Table

TUE

Schedule

ꢀ

Maintenance

Recording

Event

12PM

00 AM

SETUP MENU

Weekday Time Table

ꢀ

LIVE

12AM

Switcher

6PM

^Disp1^la⁶2^y^AM

^S0^y0^steA^mM

Com

REC

Period 1

MON

EVT

Period 2

00 AM

00 PM

Time Table

REC Prog

REC

Time Table (MON)

TUE

Per^Eio^VTd 3

01 00 PM

Copy the other Time Table

TUE

ꢀ

ꢀꢀ

ꢀ

REC

WED

WePeekrd^Eio^Va^Tdy T4ime Table

ꢀ

05 : 00 PM

Event Prog

Special Days

Peri^Ro^Ed^C1

Period 5

THU

00 AM

00 PM

08 00 AM

09 00 PM

EVT

Period 1

Per_Rio_Ed_C6

00 AM

00 PM

00 AM

FRI

Peri^Eo^Vd^T1

00 PM

REC

EVT

Period 4.

O K

CANCEL

SAT

00 PM

00 AM

Peri^Ro^Ed^C5

SUN

EVT

Peri_Ro_Ed_C6

EVERY

EVT

REC

EVT

O K

CANCEL

P2 P3

EXT.

EVT

REC

Repeat steps 7 and 8 to assign REC Prog to other

timetables.

Move the cursor to the start time input box for "Period 1"

using the arrows button.

Move the cursor to OK using the arrows button and

press the SET button.

→ The REC Prog/Event Prog will be assigned to the

selected time zone and the selected timetable win-

dow will be closed.

Rotate the jog dial to set the start time.

The end time can be set in the same way.

Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set for "Period 2" - "Period 6".

(It is not necessary to set for all of "Period 1" - "Period

6".)

Notes:

• When the SET button is pressed after moving the

cursor to CANCEL in step 9, the settings will be

canceled and the selected timetable window will be

closed.

Select OK using the arrows button and press the SET

button.

• Until the SET button is pressed after moving the

cursor to CANCEL in step 9, the programs will not

be assigned to the selected timetable.

Notes:

• To copy a timetable that is set for a different day of

the week, select "Copy the Other Time Table" at

step 3.

Then, move the cursor to select OK and press the

SET button.

• When the SET button is pressed after moving the

cursor to CANCEL in step 6, the settings will be

canceled and the selected timetable window will be

closed.

• Until the SET button is pressed after moving the

cursor to CANCEL in step 6, the settings will not be

applied to the selected timetable.

r [Special Days] Perform the settings

of recording programs for special

days

Assign timetables to special days aside from other days

of the week. Timetables for special days can be set for

up to 30 days.

Perform the settings to specify dates as special days

and apply recording schedule to the specified special

days.

[Screenshot 5]

The settings had applied to the selected timetable and the

timetable for all days of a week will be displayed.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Time Table

REC Prog

DATE

MODE

SUN 16 --

DATE

MODE

Event Prog

Special Days

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

12AM

6AM

12PM

6PM

12AM

Time Table

REC Prog

MON

TUE

WED

THU

FRI

Event Prog

Special Days

SAT

SUN

EVERY

EXT.

EVT

REC

m Move the cursor to a time zone of the day of a week to

which the REC Prog to be assigned using the arrows

button.

101

ꢀꢀ[Switcher] Perform the settings for switcher function

Perform the settings for image switching such as the

sequential display setting or the waiting screen (while log-

ging out) setting for displaying on monitors 1 and 2.

[Screenshot 2]

The "Live Sequence" pop-up menu will be displayed.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Live Sequence

ꢀꢀ

Monitor

SETUP

STEP CAM PRESET DWELL STEP CAM PRESET DWELL

Sequence Timing

₁ꢀꢀ ₁

Auto Skip

INT

OFF

CAM1

Live Sequence

ꢀꢀ

Monitor

SETUP

₂ꢀꢀ ₂

Sequence Timing

ꢀꢀ

INT

₃ꢀꢀ ₃

Auto Skip

ꢀꢀ

OFF

CAM1

OFF

Secret View

₄ꢀꢀ ₄

OFF

ꢀꢀ

Secret View

ꢀꢀ

CANCEL

Move the cursor to "CAM" of "STEP 1" using the arrows

button.

q [Monitor 1] Switcher function of

monitor 1

[Screenshot 3]

Perform the settings for the switcher function of monitor

The cursor moves to "CAM".

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Live Sequence

ꢀꢀ

Monitor

SETUP

STEP CAM PRESET DWELL STEP CAM PRESET DWELL

Monitor

Live Sequence

ꢀꢀ

SETUP

Sequence Timing

₁ꢀꢀ ₁

Auto Skip

INT

Sequence Timing

ꢀꢀ

INT

₂ꢀꢀ ₂

₃ꢀꢀ ₃

OFF

Auto Skip

ꢀꢀ

OFF

CAM1

ꢀꢀ

Secret View

₄ꢀꢀ ₄

OFF

Secret View

ꢀꢀ

OFF

CANCEL

Select how to display image from camera channels in

"STEP 1" from the following by rotating the jog dial.

1 - 16: Displays an image from the selected camera

channel on a single screen.

ꢀꢀLive Sequence

Perform the settings for the sequential display of live

images as follows.

QUAD1 - 4: Displays images from the camera channels

1 - 4 on a 4-split screen.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "Monitor1" menu of "Switcher" on

the SETUP MEN.

QUAD5 - 8: Displays images from the camera channels

5 - 8 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD9 - 12: Displays images from the camera chan-

nels

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

9 - 12 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD13 - 16: Displays images from the camera chan-

nels

Monitor

Live Sequence

ꢀꢀ

SETUP

Sequence Timing

ꢀꢀ

INT

Auto Skip

ꢀꢀ

OFF

CAM1

ꢀꢀ

Secret View

ꢀꢀ

OFF

13 - 16 on a 4-split screen.

9SCREEN1 - 9: Displays images from the camera

channels

1 - 9 on a 9-split screen.

9SCREEN10 – 16 (Only for WJ-HD316): Displays

images from the camera channels 10 - 16 on a 9-

split screen.

Move the cursor to "Live Sequence" using the arrows

button (D C ) and press the SET button.

--: Skips the selected step.

When displaying image from camera channels "1 - 16"

on a single screen is selected in step 3, select the cam-

era position.

Move the cursor to "PRESET" in "STEP 1" using the

arrows button.

102

[Screenshot 4]

ꢀ Auto Skip

The cursor moves to the "PRESET" in "STEP 1".

Select ON of OFF to determine whether or not to skip

the camera channel without supplying video input sig-

nal because it is not connected, etc..

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

ON: Skips a channel if it is not connected.

OFF: Displays a black screen for a channel not con-

nected.

Monitor

Live Sequence

^STꢀ^EPꢀ ^CAMPRESET DWELL STEP CAM PRESET DWSE

LLUP

Sequence Timing

ꢀꢀ

-- INT2s

Auto Skip

ꢀꢀ

OFF

CAM1

ꢀꢀ

Secret View

OFF

ꢀ Login Screen

CANCEL

Select a camera image to be displayed during the login

procedure from the following.

CAM1 - 16: Displays an image from the selected cam-

era channel.

QUAD1 - 4: Displays images from the camera channels

1 - 4 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD5 - 8: Displays images from the camera channels

5 - 8 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD9 - 12: Displays images from the camera chan-

nels 9 - 12 on a 4-split screen.

Rotate the jog dial to select a preset position number of

which image is displayed in "STEP 1" from the following.

1 - 64: Moves to the selected preset number.

--: Does not move to the preset position.

Select "DWELL" in "STEP 1" using the arrows button.

[Screenshot 5]

QUAD13 - 16: Displays images from the camera chan-

nels 13 - 16 on a 4-split screen.

The cursor moves to the "DWELL" in "STEP 1".

7 SCREEN: Displays images from the camera channels

1 - 7 on a 7-split screen.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

9 SCREEN 1 - 9: Displays images from the camera

channels 1 - 9 on a 9-split screen.

9 SCREEN 10 - 16 (only for WJ-HD316): Displays

images from the camera channels 10 - 16 on a 9-

split screen.

Live Sequence

SETUP

STEP CAM PRESET DWELL STEP CAM PRESET DWELL

Monitor

ꢀꢀ

Sequence Timing

₁ꢀꢀ ₁

Auto Skip

INT

₂ꢀꢀ ₂

OFF

₃ꢀꢀ ₃

CAM1

Secret View

₄ꢀꢀ ₄

OFF

CANCEL

10 SCREEN: Displays images from the camera chan-

nels 1 - 10 on a 10-split screen.

13 SCREEN: Displays images from the camera chan-

nels 1 - 13 on a 13-split screen.

16 SCREEN: Displays images from the camera chan-

nels 1 - 16 on a 16-split screen.

m Rotate the jog dial to select an interval time to go to the

next sequential step from 1 - 30 seconds (in 1 second

intervals).

The sequence step is skipped when "0 s" is selected.

Repeat steps 2 and 7 to set for other sequence steps.

--: No camera image will be displayed (screen in black)

ꢀ Secret View

Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button and

press the SET button.

The secret view is a function to display a screen in

black on monitor 1 when camera images displayed with

a single screen on monitor 2. Select ON or OFF to

determine whether to enable or disable the secret view

function.

ON: Enables the secret view function. (Camera image

displayed with a single screen on monitor 2 will be

displayed on monitor 1 in black screen.)

→ The settings for the sequential display is set and the

sequence setting menu closes.

Notes:

• If you move the cursor to "CANCEL" in the step 8

and press the SET button, the setting is canceled

and the sequence setting menu closes.

• The settings for the sequential display will not be

applied until the SET button is pressed after select-

ing "OK" using the arrows button in step 8.

OFF: Disables the secret view function.

ꢀ Sequence Timing

Select an image switching way from the following.

INT: Switches images according to the settings for the

live sequence.

EXT: Switches images by signals from an external

device.

MON 2: Match with the image switching timing of the

live sequence on monitor 2.

103

w [Monitor 2] Switcher function of

monitor 2

Perform the setting for the switcher function of monitor

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Live Sequence

Monitor

ꢀꢀ

SETUP

Sequence Timing

ꢀꢀ

INT

Auto Skip

ꢀꢀ

OFF

CAM1

OFF

ꢀꢀ

Secret View

ꢀꢀ

ꢀ Live Sequence

The settings for "Live Sequence" are the same as for

"Monitor1". Refer to page xx for further information.

ꢀ Sequence Timing

The settings for "Sequence Timing" are the same as for

"Monitor1". Refer to page xx for further information.

• "EXT" is selectable only when an external device

that can transmit a sequence signal is connected.

• The sequence changeover I/O on the rear panel will

supply signals when "INT" is selected and will

receive signals when "EXT" is selected.

ꢀ Auto Skip

The settings for "Auto Skip" are the same as for

"Monitor1". Refer to page xx for further information.

ꢀ Login Screen

The settings for "Login Screen" are the same as for

"Monitor1". Refer to page xx for further information.

104

ꢀꢀDisplay

Perform the display settings for monitors 1 and 2 connected

to the unit.

Move the cursor to "CAM1" using the arrows button.

[Screenshot 3]

The cursor moves to " CAM1".

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Camera Title

ꢀꢀ

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

OSD Setup

Time & Date Display Position

ꢀꢀ

Monitor

Camera Title Display Position

ꢀꢀ

Line Color on the Multi Screen

ꢀꢀ

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Camera Title

_CAM1ꢀꢀ _CAM1

SETUP

OSD Setup

Time & Date Display Position

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

_CAM2ꢀꢀ _CAM2

Monitor

Camera Title Display Position

ꢀꢀ

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM3

Line Color on the Multi Screen

ꢀꢀ

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CANCEL

q OSD Setup

Perform the On Screen Display settings for monitor 1

and monitor 2 such as the settings of camera titles or

the settings of the time display position.

Select a character to be entered by rotating the jog dial.

Up to 16 characters can be entered.

Move the cursor to the right side of the entered charac-

ter using the arrows button.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Camera Title

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

ꢀꢀ

OSD Setup

Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the camera title.

Time & Date Display Position

ꢀꢀ

Monitor

Camera Title Display Position

ꢀꢀ

Line Color on the Multi Screen

ꢀꢀ

Notes:

• To correct the entered characters, move the cursor

to the character to be corrected and press the

STOP button to delete it. Enter a correct character

after deleting.

• To copy the camera title that has been set for

another camera channel, follow the procedure

below.

ꢀ Camera Title

Perform the settings for the camera title. Do the follow-

ings to set the camera title.

1. Move the cursor to "CAM 1" in step 2 on the pre-

vious page and press the SET button. The fol-

lowing screen will be displayed.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "OSD Setup" menu.

Maintenance

Recording

CAM1

Display

Event

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

CAM2

Copy Another Camera Title

ꢀꢀ

DISPLAY

LIVE

CAM1

Switcher

Com

Embedded CAM1

DISPLAY

CAM2

Time & Date Display Position

CAM2

Common Setup

Camera Title

SETUP

ꢀꢀ

Embedded

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

ꢀDꢀISPLAY

CAM3

LIVE

Monitor

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

Embedded

O K

CANCEL

Camera TCitAleMD3isplay Position

ꢀꢀ

DISPLAY

CAM4

CAM5

Line Color on the Multi Screen

ꢀꢀ

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

Embedded

Camera Title

ꢀꢀ

OSD Setup

DISPLAY

Time & Date Display Position

ꢀꢀ

Monitor

Embedded CAM5

DISPLAY CAM6

Embedded CAM6

DISPLAY CAM7

Embedded CAM7

DISPLAY CAM8

Embedded CAM8

Camera Title Display Position

ꢀꢀ

Line Color on the Multi Screen

ꢀꢀ

CANCEL

2. Select the camera channel of which camera title

is to be copied by rotating the jog dial.

3. Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button

and press the SET button. The camera title will

be copied.

Move the cursor to "Camera Title" using the arrows but-

ton (D C ) and press the SET button.

[Screenshot 2]

The camera title pop-up window will be displayed.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Camera Title

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

ꢀꢀ

OSD Setup

Time & Date Display Position

_CAMꢀ₁ꢀ

Monitor

Camera Title Display Position

_CAMꢀ₂ꢀ

Line Color on the Multi Screen

ꢀꢀ

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CANCEL

105

Note: When setting the camera title to be recorded

together with images, the time display will be recorded

in the selected position.

[Screenshot 4]

The camera title is entered.

Refer to page xx for further information about

"Embedded REC (title)".

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

OSD Setup

Camera Title

SETUP

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

WHITE

ꢀꢀ

CAMT1ime &CDAaMte1 Display Position

Monitor

Camera Title Display Position

ꢀꢀ

CAM2

ENTRANCE

Line Color on the Multi Screen

ꢀꢀ

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

ꢀ Line Color on the Multi Screen

Select a line color from the following.

OFF: No dividing line

CANCEL

WHITE: Displays white lines.

GRAY: Displays gray lines.

BLACK: Displays black lines.

Press the arrows button (A, B, C and D) to move the

cursor to "OK" and press the SET button.

→ The camera title is set and the setting screen of the

camera title closes.

w [Monitor 1] Settings on monitor 1

display

Select ON and OFF whether or not to display the time,

camera title and alarm display on the monitor 1.

Notes:

• If you move the cursor to "CANCEL" in the step 5

and press the SET button, the setting is canceled

and the setting screen of the camera title closes.

• The settings for the camera title will not be applied

until the SET button is pressed after selecting "OK"

using the arrows button in step 5.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Time & Date Display

ꢀꢀ

OSD Setup

Camera Title Display Position

ꢀꢀ

Monitor

Alarm Display

ꢀꢀ

ꢀ Time and Date Display Position

Select a time and date display position from the follow-

ing.

ꢀ Time & Date Display

L-UPPER: Displays the time at the upper left of the

Select ON and OFF whether or not to display the time.

ON: Displays time.

screen.

R-UPPER: Displays the time at the upper right of the

OFF: Does not function.

screen.

L-LOWER: Displays the time at the lower left of the

screen.

ꢀ Camera Title Display

R-LOWER: Displays the time at the lower right of the

Select ON and OFF whether or not to display the cam-

era title.

screen.

ON: Displays the camera title.

OFF: Does not function.

Notes:

• When setting the time and date to be recorded

together with images, the time display will be

recorded in the selected position.

• Refer to page xx for further information about

"Embedded REC (Time & Date)".

ꢀ Alarm Display

Select ON and OFF whether or not to activate the alarm

display at an event occurrence.

ON: Displays the alarm display at an event occurrence.

OFF: Does not function.

ꢀ Camera Title Display Position

Select a camera title display position from the following.

L-UPPER: Displays the camera title at the upper left of

the screen.

L-LOWER: Displays the camera title at the lower left of

the screen.

R-UPPER: Displays the camera title at the upper right

of the screen.

R-LOWER: Displays the camera title at the lower right

of the screen.

CENTER: Displays the camera title at the center of the

screen.

106

e [Monitor2] Settings on monitor 2

display

Perform the displaying settings for monitor 2 such as

the task bar style, time display position on/off, camera

title display position, etc..

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

OSD Setup

LIVE

Style of Screen

ꢀꢀ

STANDARD

LOWER

T&D and Status Display Position

ꢀꢀ

Monitor

Camera Title Display

ꢀꢀ

The following explains the settings of the monitor 2 and

the VGA monitor such as the task bar display style, time

display position, camera title display ON/OFF, etc.

ꢀ Style of screen

Select a task bar style form the followings.

Refer to page XX for further information about the task

bar style.

Style1: Select [Style1] for the style of screen.

Style2: Select [Style2] for the style of screen.

Style3: Select [Style3] for the style of screen.

ꢀ T & D and Status Display Position

When selecting the style 1, select the position of the

time and date display and the status from the following.

UPPER: Displays them at the upper part of the screen.

LOWER: Displays them at the lower part of the screen.

ꢀ Camera Title Display

Select ON and OFF whether or not to display the cam-

era title.

ON: Displays the camera title.

OFF: Does not function.

107

ꢀ [Communication] Settings for communications with other devices

It is necessary to adjust communication speed and use the

same communication protocol with external devices such

as a controller when connecting those external devices to

the DATA port or the SERIAL port (RS232C).

It is also required to perform the settings for the network

such as the IP address and the gateway address when

operating this unit a PC via a network such as LAN.

These are the descriptions of how to perform the required

settings for communication with external devices.

It is possible to compensate the video signal trans-

mission loss from the camera when using the

VIDEO IN connector 1 - 8. (cable compensation)

Perform the setting for the cable compensation

according to the used cable length.

S: When the used cable length is shorter than 500

M: When the used cable length longer than 500 m

and shorter than 900 m

L: When the used cable length longer than 900 m

and shorter than 1 200 m

q [Camera Control] Settings of the

communication method and the

cable compensation for camera

control

Notes:

• Use 5C-2V cables for the cable compensation.

• Perform the setting for the cable compensation

properly according to the cable length. Otherwise

camera pictures may not be displayed/recorded

correctly.

Select a communication method for each camera chan-

nel to control cameras from the following.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

w [PS Data Setup] Settings for the

Camera Control

PS.Data Setup

RS485 Setup

Type of Camera Control

ꢀꢀ

CAM

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

COMP

TYPE

COAX

CAM

TYPE

PS·Data

CAM9

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

RS232C Setup

PSD

NW Setup

Perform the following settings for the PS·Data.

NTP Setup

RS485

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

001

OFF

9600

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

Unit Adress(System)

ꢀꢀ

Unit Adress(Controller)

ꢀꢀ

Cascade

ꢀꢀ

Baud Rate

ꢀꢀ

RS232C Setup

Data Bit

ꢀꢀ

NONE

Parity

ꢀꢀ

NW Setup

Stop Bit

ꢀꢀ

Coaxial: Controls camera with the coaxial communica-

tion (CAM 1 - 8 CH are available for WJ-HD316,

CAM 1 - 6 CH are available for WJ-HD309)

PSD: Controls camera with the PS·Data. (CAM 9 - 16

CH are available for WJ-HD316, CAM 7 - 9 CH are

available for WJ-HD309)

RS 485: Controls camera with the RS 485 communica-

tion. (CAM 1 - 16 CH are available for WJ-HD316,

CAM 1 - 9 CH are available for WJ-HD309)

OFF: Does not control camera (CAM 1 - 16 CH are

available)

OFF

Retry Timing

ꢀꢀ

NTP Setup

Alarm Data

ꢀꢀ

SETUP

Camera Number Setup

ꢀꢀ

ꢀ Unit Address (System)

A unit address (System) is a unique number assigning

to PS·Data devices. The addresses must be unique to

identify system devices when connecting multiple

devices compatible with PS·Data. Numbers, "001"-"099",

are to be assigned as the unit addresses to the system

devices.

Notes:

• Perform settings according to the cameras connect-

ed to this unit.

ꢀ Unit Address (Controller)

• CAM 9-16 control 4 cameras each (only for

WJHD316).

The unit address (controller) is used to control a

PS•Data device connected to this unit. Numbers, "001"

- "099" are to be assigned.

• When using the coaxial communication to control

cameras, connect cameras to the VIDEO IN con-

nectors 1 - 8 for WJ-HD316 (1 - 6 for WJ-HD309)

(coaxial communication compatible). When control-

ling cameras connected to other VIDEO IN connec-

tors with coaxial communication, use a coaxial com-

munication unit (WJ-MP204). In this case, select

"PSD" for the communication method for the camera

channels to be controlled through the axial commu-

nication unit.

ꢀ Cascade

Select ON or OFF whether or not to use the cascade

connection.

Set this to ON when connecting two units or more in the

cascade connection.

ON: Select this when connect units in the cascade con-

nection.

OFF: Does not function.

• To prevent operation mistake, set to OFF for the

unused camera channels.

108

ꢀ Baud Rate

[Screenshot 2]

Select communication speed for data transmission with

a connected device from the following.

The "Camera Number Setup" pop-up window will be dis-

played.

2 400/4 800/9 600/19 200/38 400 bps

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

ꢀ Data Bit

Camera Number Setup

_Contrꢀ_olꢀ

001

Camera

Unit Adress(System)

ꢀꢀ

Unit Adress(Controller)

ꢀꢀ

^SetupCAM PORT

PS.DATA

CAM No.

001

CAM PORT _OFC_FAM No.

Cascade

ꢀꢀ

RS485 Setup

RS232C Setup

009

It is impossible to change the value for this setting.

8 bit

9600

Baud Rate

ꢀꢀ

002

010

Data Bit

ꢀꢀ

003

^NONE011

Parity

ꢀꢀ

NW Setup

Stop Bit

ꢀꢀ

004

012

OFF

013

Retry Timing

ꢀꢀ

005

NTP Setup

Alarm Data

ꢀꢀ

006

_S0_ET1_U4_P

015

Camera Number Setup

ꢀꢀ

007

008

016

ꢀ Parity

O K

CANCEL

Select a method to check a transmission error at com-

munication from the following.

NONE: No parity check

EVEN: Even parity

ODD: Odd parity

Move the cursor to a desired "CAM No." of "CAM PORT"

using the arrows button.

[Screenshot 3]

ꢀ Stop Bit

The cursor will move to the selected "CAM No." of "CAM

PORT".

Select a stop bit from the following.

1 bit/2 bit

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

ꢀ Retry Timing

Camera Number Setup

ꢀꢀ

001

Camera Control

Unit Adress(System)

ꢀꢀ

Unit Adress(Controller)

ꢀꢀ

_SetupCAM PORT

CAM No.

CAM PORT

CAM No.

PS.DATA

Select a retransmission interval when data reception is

not confirmed from the following.

OFF/100 ms/200 ms/400 ms/1 000 ms

OFF

9600

Cascade

ꢀꢀ

001

009

010

RS485 Setup

RS232C Setup

Baud Rate

ꢀꢀ

002

Data Bit

ꢀꢀ

003

_NONE011

Parity

ꢀꢀ

NW Setup

004

012

013

014

Stop Bit

ꢀꢀ

OFF

Retry Timi0n0g5

ꢀꢀ

NTP Setup

Alarm Data

ꢀꢀ

006

SETUP

015

Camera Number Setup

ꢀꢀ

007

008

016

O K

CANCEL

ꢀ Alarm Data

Select a method to inform the connected controller of

an event occurrence from the following.

OFF: Does not function.

0 s: Informs the controller every time an event is detect-

ed.

Select a camera number by rotating the jog dial.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to assign camera numbers of

other CAM PORT.

1 s/5 s: Informs the controller when specified time has

passed after detecting an event.

Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button to and

press the SET button.

→ Camera numbers will be assigned and the "Camera

Number Setup" menu will be closed.

ꢀ Camera Number Setup

It is possible to assign a number to each camera chan-

nel to operate cameras using the controller compatible

with PS·Data.

Do the followings to assign numbers to the camera

channels.

Notes:

• When moving the cursor to "CANCEL" in step 4 and

press the SET button, the setting will be canceled

and the "Camera Number Setup" menu will be

closed.

• The assignment of camera numbers will not be

applied until the SET button is pressed after moving

the cursor to "OK" in the step 4.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "PS·Data Setup" menu.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

e [RS485 Setup] Settings for RS485

001

OFF

9600

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

Unit Adress(System)

ꢀꢀ

Unit Adress(Controller)

ꢀꢀ

Cascade

ꢀꢀ

Baud Rate

ꢀꢀ

Perform the following settings for RS485.

RS232C Setup

Data Bit

ꢀꢀ

NONE

Parity

ꢀꢀ

NW Setup

Stop Bit

ꢀꢀ

OFF

Retry Timing

ꢀꢀ

NTP Setup

Alarm Data

ꢀꢀ

SETUP

Camera Number Setup

ꢀꢀ

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

19200

Baud Rate

ꢀꢀ

Control Camera CH

SETUP

ꢀꢀ

Data Bit

ꢀꢀ

NONE

Parity

ꢀꢀ

RS232C Setup

Stop Bit

ꢀꢀ

NW Setup

NTP Setup

Move the cursor to "Camera Number Setup" using the

arrows button (D C ) and press the SET button.

109

Move the cursor to "OK" using the arrows button and

press the SET button.

ꢀ Baud Rate

Select communication speed for data transmission with

a connected device from the following.

4 800/9 600 /19 200 (bps)

→ Camera channels will be assigned and the "Control

Camera CH" menu will be closed.

Notes:

ꢀ Control Camera CH

• When moving the cursor to "CANCEL" in step 4 and

press the SET button, the setting will be canceled

and the "Camera Number Setup" menu will be

closed.

• The assignment of camera channels will not be

applied until the SET button is pressed after moving

the cursor to "OK" in the step 4.

It is possible to assign camera channels to the RS485

ports 1 and 2 as below.

[Screenshot 1]

Start operation from the "RS485 Setup" menu.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

ꢀ Data Bit

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

19200

Baud Rate

ꢀꢀ

Control Camera CH

SETUP

ꢀꢀ

Data Bit

ꢀꢀ

The data length for communication will be displayed.

It is impossible to change the value for this setting.

NONE

Parity

ꢀꢀ

RS232C Setup

Stop Bit

ꢀꢀ

NW Setup

NTP Setup

ꢀ Parity

Methods to check a transmission error at communica-

tion will be displayed.

It is impossible to change the value for this setting.

Move the cursor to "Control Camera CH" using the

arrows button ($TD $TC) and press the SET button.

ꢀ Stop Bit

Number of stop bit will be displayed.

It is impossible to change the value for this setting.

[Screenshot 2]

The "Control Camera CH" pop-up window will be displayed.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

r [RS232C Setup] Settings for RS232C

Control Camera CH

ꢀꢀ

Camera Control

19200

SETUP

TERM

Baud Rate

ꢀꢀ

Control Camera CH

ꢀꢀ

PS.DATA Setup

CAMERA

TERM

PORT1

CAMERA

CAM9

Data Bit

ꢀꢀ

Perform the following settings for RS232C.

RS485 Setup

CAM1

PORT2

NONE

Parity

ꢀꢀ

CAM2

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

PORT2

RS232C Setup

Stop Bit

ꢀꢀ

CAM3

PORT2

NW Setup

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

NTP Setup

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

Unit Adress(System)

ꢀꢀ

001

9600

NONE

O K

CANCEL

Baud Rate

ꢀꢀ

Data Bit

ꢀꢀ

Parity

ꢀꢀ

RS232C Setup

Stop Bit

ꢀꢀ

OFF

Retry Timing

ꢀꢀ

NW Setup

NTP Setup

Move the cursor to a desired cell in the "TERM" column

using the arrows button.

[Screenshot 3]

The cursor will move to the selected cell in the "TERM" col-

umn.

ꢀ Unit Address(System)

A unit address (System) is a unique number assigning

to each system device. The addresses must be unique

to identify system devices when connecting multiple

system devices.

Numbers, "001"-"099", are to be assigned to the unit

addresses to the system devices.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Control Camera CH

_Conꢀ_troꢀ_l

19200

SETUP

Camera

Baud Rate

ꢀꢀ

Control Camera CH

ꢀꢀ

PS.DATA

^SetupCAMERA

TERM

PORT1

CAMERA

CAM9

TERM

Data Bit

ꢀꢀ

RS485 Setup

RS232C Setup

CAM1

PORT2

NONE

PORT2

Parity

ꢀꢀ

CAM2

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

Stop Bit

ꢀꢀ

CAM3

PORT2

NW Setup

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

NTP Setup

ꢀ Baud Rate

O K

CANCEL

Select communication speed for data transmission with

a connected device from the following.

9 600/19 200/38 400 (bps)

Select a port by rotating the jog dial.

PORT 1: Control through the RS485 port 1.

PORT 2: Control through the RS485 port 2.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to assign other camera channels

to be controlled through the RS485 ports.

ꢀ Data Bit

Select a data length for communication from the follow-

ing.

7/8 bit

110

ꢀ Parity

ꢀ Line Speed

Select a method to check a transmission error at com-

The line speed will be displayed.

munication from the following.

NONE: No parity check

EVEN: Even parity

It is impossible to change the value for this setting.

ꢀ Live Video Quality

ODD: Odd parity

Image quality level for a live (FQB: high quality) will be

displayed.

ꢀ Stop Bit

It is impossible to change the value for this setting.

Select a stop bit from the following.

1/2 bit

y [NW Setup 2] Network connection

ꢀ Retry Timing

settings

Select a retransmission interval when data reception is

not confirmed from the following.

OFF/100 ms/200 ms/400 ms/1 000 ms

Perform the following network connection settings to

operate this unit using a PC via a network such as LAN.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Camera Control

PS.Data Setup

RS485 Setup

DHCP

IP Adress

Subnet Mask

Gateway

DNS

Primary

Secondary

DDNS

ꢀꢀ

User Name

OFF

ꢀ

t [NW Setup 1] Basic network settings

192

255

192

168

255

168

000

250

255

000

001

RS232C Setup

MANUAL

000

Perform the following basic network settings to operate

this unit using a PC via a network such as LAN.

000

NW Setup

000

OFF

NTP Setup

Password

Access Interval

10m

Host Name

ꢀꢀ

HD316

Domain Name

ꢀꢀ

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

localdomain

SETUP MENU

LIVE

DHCP

OFF

Camera Control

PS.Data Setup

RS485 Setup

ꢀ

192

255

192

168

255

168

000

250

IP Adress

Subnet Mask

Gateway

DNS

Primary

Secondary

255

000

001

RS232C Setup

MANUAL

000

ꢀ DHCP

000

NW Setup

000

OFF

DDNS

ꢀꢀ

User Name

Select ON or OFF whether or not to use the DHCP serv-

er.

NTP Setup

Password

Access Interval

Host Name

ꢀꢀ

HD316

10m

Domain Name

ꢀꢀ

When obtaining IP addresses, net mask and a gateway

address from the DHCP server, set to ON.

If not, set to OFF and enter those addresses manually.

ON: Uses the DHCP server.

localdomain

ꢀ HTTP Port Number

OFF: Does not use the DHCP server.

Specify the HTTP port number to be used to transfer

images from this unit. It is not necessary to change it for

normal use.

ꢀ IP Address

Enter an IP address when OFF is selected for "DHCP".

For this unit, enter 4 units of the decimal number (0-

255).

ꢀ User Authentication

Select ON and OFF whether or not to activate user

authentication at access from a PC to this unit.

When ON is selected, the user authentication window

will be displayed at access from a PC.

The top page will be displayed if the entered user name

and password are registered.

ꢀ Subnet Mask

Enter a subnet mask according to the network configu-

ration when OFF is selected for "DHCP".

ON: Activates user authentication.

OFF: Does not function.

ꢀ Gateway

Enter the gateway address according to the network

configuration when OFF is selected for "DHCP".

Note: It is recommended to set to ON for the user

authentication for security.

ꢀ DNS

Select "MANUAL" or "AUTO" to enable searching an IP

address by its host name using DNS. When "OFF" is

selected for "DHCP" (no use of the DHCP server), select

"MANUAL" and enter the domain name and the DNS

server address. If "ON" is selected for "DHCP" (use of

the DHCP server), select "AUTO". When DNS is not

used, select "OFF".

ꢀ Host Authentication

Select ON or OFF whether or not to restrict access by

IP addresses at access from a PC to this unit.

When ON is selected, only PCs with registered IP

address can access this unit

Using the user authentication together will enhance the

network security.

When "MANUAL" is selected for DNS, enter the DNS

server address for "Primary" and "Secondary".

ON: Activates host authentication.

OFF: Does not function.

111

ꢀ DDNS

Select ON and OFF whether or not to use the DDNS

(Dynamic Domain Name Server).

Selecting ON is available only when "MANUAL" or

"AUTO" is selected for "DNS".

When "ON" is selected, perform the following.

User Name: Enter the user name registered in "DDNS".

Password: Enter the password for the user entered in

"User Name".

Access Interval: Select an interval to update DNS from

the following.

10 m/30 m/1 h/6 h/24 h

ꢀ Host Name

Enter the host address registered in DDNS.

Enter alphanumeric characters of 255 or less, and also

hyphen (-) is available for the host name.

ꢀ Domain Name

Enter the domain name of this unit.

Enter alphanumeric characters of 255 or less, and also

hyphen (-) is available for the domain name.

u [NTP Setup] Time adjustment of

network

Perform the following settings for time adjustment.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Camera Control

PS.DATA Setup

RS485 Setup

Time Adjustment

ꢀ

GGMMTT+-51:10:000

Time Zone

ꢀ

NTP Server Address

RS232C Setup

Refresh Interval

ꢀ

NW Setup

NTP Setup

localhost

ꢀ Time Adjustment

Select ON and OFF whether or not to adjust the time

with reference to the NTP server.

ON: Adjusts time with reference to the NTP server.

OFF: Does not function.

ꢀ Time Zone

Set the time zone in accordance with a place of use

when using the NTP server for time adjustment.

ꢀ NTP Server Address

Enter the NTP server address when using the NTP serv-

er for time adjustment.

ꢀ Refresh Interval

Select an interval of time inquiry to be transmitted to the

NTP server from the following.

1 h/2 h/6 h/12 h/24 h

112

function when the selected time has passed after

ꢀ [System] Settings on System

Perform the following system settings required to operate

this unit.

Important:

The auto logout function will not be activated when ON

is selected for "Auto Login".

Depending on the user level of the auto login user,

operable functions may be different.

q [Basic Setup] Basic system settings

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

ꢀ Priority

Basic Setup

ADMIN Password

ꢀ

*****

PSD User

ADMIN

Auto Login

Auto Login User

ADMIN

Auto Logout

Priority

"GO TO LAST" before

Language

ꢀꢀ

Beep(Operation)

Buzzer(Error)

Suspend Time at the UPS Usage

Auto Copy

Time

Date

User Regist.

User Edit

Assign operating priorities when multiple users access

this unit simultaneously from the following.

A priority is followed: Operation by a user with higher

priority will be performed.

Pre-priority: Operation by the first accessed user will

be performed regardless of priority.

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

OFF

ꢀ

A Priority is followed

ENGLISH

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

ꢀ

30s

OFF

Post-priority: Operation by the last accessed user will

be performed regardless of priority.

Perform the following settings for basic operation.

ꢀ "GO TO LAST" before

ꢀ ADMIN Password

Select time to be skipped when the "GO TO LAST" but-

ton is pressed during playback from the following.

5 s/10 s/30 s/1 m/5 m

Set the password for an administrator.

Enter 4-32 alphanumeric characters.

It is the same way to enter, insert and delete characters

as for text information attached to image. Refer to page

xx.

ꢀ Language

Select a language for the SETUP MENU from the follow-

ꢀ PSD User

ing.

JAPANESE/ENGLISH/FRANCAIS/ESPANOL/DEUTSCH/

ITALIANO

When a user operate a controller compatible with

PS·Data, operation will be restricted by priority and

operational level of PSD user.

ꢀ Beep (Operation)

PSD user should be one of the users registered in this

unit.

Select ON or OFF whether or not to beep the buzzer

when operating the buttons.

ꢀ Auto Login

ON: Sounds the buzzer when operating the buttons.

OFF: Does not sound the buzzer when operating the

buttons.

Select ON and OFF whether or not to activate the auto

ON: Activates the auto login function.

ꢀ Buzzer (Alarm)

OFF: Does not activate the auto login function. It is nec-

essary to perform the login operation every time

starting up this unit.

Select a buzzer operation at a trouble occurrence from

the following.

OFF: Does not sound buzzer at a trouble occurrence.

1 s - 30 s (in 1 second step)/40 s/50 s/1 m/1 m/3 m/4

m/5 m (in 1 minute step): A buzzer will sound for

the selected duration after a trouble occurred.

EXT: The buzzer will sound continuously until the

"ALARM RESET" button on the front panel of the unit

is pressed.

ꢀ Auto Login User

When ON is selected for "Auto Login", the registered

auto login user can login the unit automatically.

An auto login user should be one of the users regis-

tered in this unit.

ꢀ Auto Logout

ꢀ Shutdown Time

Select ON or OFF whether or not to activate the auto

logout function.

When ON is selected, auto logout will be made after a

specified time has passed while displaying live image

without operation.

Select a waiting time until starting the internal process-

ing against the power outage after a outage detection

signal is supplied to the unit from the following.

10 s/20 s/30 s/1 m/2 m/3 m/4 m/5 m

OFF: Does not activate the auto logout function.

1 m/2 m/3 m/4 m/5 m/30 m: Activates the auto logout

113

SLAVE: A signal will be supplied to the ALARM/CON-

TROL connector on the rear and clock of this unit

will be adjusted.

ꢀ Auto Copy

Select ON or OFF whether or not to copy recorded

images to the copy area on the hard disk automatically.

OFF: Does not copy automatically.

ON: Copies recorded images to the copy area on the

hard disk of this unit.

ꢀ Master Time

Specify the time when supplying a signal from the

ALARM/CONTROL connector.

Important:

When OFF is selected, auto copy function at an event

occurrence and emergency recording will not function.

ꢀ Summer Time (Day Light Saving)

Select a way of how to switch the summer time from

among the following.

OFF: Does not function.

w [Time & Date Setup] Setting of date

ON: Applies the summer time.

AUTO: Applies the summer time in accordance with the

setting of the summer time (see next page).

and time

Perform the following settings of time and date.

ꢀ Summer Time (Day Light Saving) Table

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Do the following to specify the start time & date and

end time & date of the summer time.

Basic Setup

Date Format

Time Format

JAN

ꢀ

MMM.DD.YY

OFF

Time

Date

10 10 10

User Regist.

User Edit

SET

OFF

10 :00

Auto Adjust Time

MASTER Time

ꢀ

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

AUTO

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)Table

ꢀ

[Screenshot 1]

SETUP

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Start operation from the "Time & Date" menu.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Basic Setup

Date Format

ꢀ

MMM.DD.YY

OFF

10 10 10

Time Format

Time

Date

JAN

ꢀ Date Format

User Regist.

User Edit

SET

OFF

Auto Adjust Time

MASTER Time

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)

ꢀ

10 :00

AUTO

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Select a display format for date from the following.(Ex.

April 1, 2003)

YY.MM.DD: 03.4.1

ꢀ

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)Table

SETUP

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

MMM.DD.YY: APR.1.03

DD.MMM.YY: 1.APR.03

Move the cursor to "Summer Time (Day Light Saving)

Table" using the arrows button ($TD $TC) to and press

the SET button.

ꢀ Time Format

Select a display format for time from the following. (Ex.

3 oÅfclock just in the afternoon)

12h: 3:00:00 PM

[Screenshot 2]

24h: 15:00:00

The "Summer Time (Day Light Saving) Table" will be dis-

played.

ꢀ Time Setup

Adjust the current date and time.

OFF

DMispla-y-

Recording

Event

Maintenance

Schedule

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Enter year, month, day, hour, minute and second in

order, move the cursor to "SET" and press the SET but-

ton.

SwitcOhNer

-- Com

HSys-t-em M

OFF

Basic Setup

Date Format

MMM.DD.YY

ꢀ

OFF

Time Format

ꢀ

Time

Date

JAN

10 10 10

OFF

User Regist.

User Edit

SET

OFF

Auto Adjust Time

ꢀ

OFF

10 :00

MASTER Time

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

AUTO

OFF

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)

ꢀ

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)Table

ꢀ

SETUP

OFF

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

ꢀ Auto Adjust Time

OFF

Select a method for auto time adjustment from the fol-

lowing.

CANCEL

When "MASTER" is selected, a signal will be supplied

from the ALARM/CONTROL connector as the MASTER

time (see below) at the specified time.

OFF: Does not function.

Move the cursor to enter the ON or OFF time (year,

month, date) for the summer time using the arrows but-

ton.

MASTER:

signal will be supplied from the

ALARM/CONTROL connector on the rear and the

clock of other devices will be adjusted with refer-

ence to the time of this unit.

114

[Screenshot 3]

ꢀ Password

The cursor will move to the selected cell for entry of the ON

or OFF time for summer time.

Enter 4-32 alphanumeric characters for password.

It is the same way to enter, insert and delete characters

as for text information attached to image. Refer to page

xx.

Recording

Event

Schedule

H 00

^M1^aintenance

SETUP MENU

LIVE

OFF

Switcher

Display

Com

System

OFF

ꢀ _OFF

Date Format

MMM.DD.YY

Basic Setup

ꢀ

OFF

Time Format

Time

Date

JAN

10 10 10

ꢀ Level

OFF

User Regist.

User Edit

SET

OFF

Auto Adjust Time

ꢀ

10 :00

OFF

MASTER Time

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

AUTO

ON -- --

Select a user level from the following.

Setting of operable functions in each level are

described in "User Level" (Refer to page xx).

LV1/LV2/LV3

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)

6ꢀ _OFF

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)Table

ꢀ

SETUP

OFF

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

CANCEL

ꢀ Priority

Rotate the jog dial to enter the ON or OFF time (year,

month, date) for the summer time.

Assign priority (1 (lowest) to 16 (highest) to users.

ꢀ Default Screen

Select a camera image to be displayed during the

logon procedure from the following.

CAM1 - 16: Displays an image from the selected cam-

era channel.

Move the cursor to "OK" and press the SET button.

→ The ON and OFF time for the summer time will be

applied and the "Summer Time (Day Light Saving)

Table" will be closed.

QUAD1 - 4: Displays images from the camera channels

1 - 4 on a 4-split screen.

Notes:

QUAD5 - 8: Displays images from the camera channels

5 - 8 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD9 - 12: Displays images from the camera chan-

nels 9 - 12 on a 4-split screen.

• When moving the cursor to "CANCEL" in step 4 and

press the SET button, the setting will be canceled

and the " Summer Time (Day Light Saving) Table "

will be closed.

QUAD13 - 16: Displays images from the camera chan-

nels 13 - 16 on a 4-split screen.

7 SCREEN: Displays images from the camera channels

1 - 7 on a 7-split screen.

• The settings for the summer time will not be applied

until the SET button is pressed after moving the cur-

sor to "OK" in the step 4.

9 SCREEN 1 - 9: Displays images from the camera

channels 1 - 9 on a 9-split screen.

9 SCREEN 10 - 16 (only for WJ-HD316): Displays

images from the camera channels 10 - 16 on a 9-

split screen.

10 SCREEN: Displays images from the camera chan-

nels 1 - 10 on a 10-split screen.

13 SCREEN: Displays images from the camera chan-

nels 1 - 13 on a 13-split screen.

e [User Registration] Registration of

user who operates this unit

word.

After filling the user information, move the cursor to

"SET" at the lower right on the menu and press the SET

button to complete registration.

16 SCREEN: Displays images from the camera chan-

nels 1 - 16 on a 16-split screen.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

SEQ: Images will be displayed in the sequential dis-

play.

User Name

ꢀ

Basic Setup

Time

Date

User Password

User Regist.

User Edit

Level

Priority

Default Screen

Camera Partitioning

ꢀ

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

CAM1

ꢀ Camera Partitioning

View/Operate

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM9

View/Operate

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Select a controllable range for each camera channel

from the following.

SET

View/Operate: Displaying live images and operating

camera are available.

View: Displaying live images is available but cannot

operate cameras.

--: Both displaying live images and operating camera

are impossible.

ꢀ User Name

Enter 4-32 alphanumeric characters for a user name.

It is the same way to enter, insert and delete characters

as for text information attached to image. Refer to page

xx.

115

ꢀ Host IP Address

r [User Edit] Correction of registered

Enter the IP address. Move the cursor to "Host IP

Address" and rotate the jog dial to enter the IP address.

For this unit, enter 4 units of the decimal number (0-

255).

user information

It is possible to edit registered user information.

Move the cursor to "User Name" and rotate the jog dial

to select the user name.

Registered information will be displayed.

Editing can be performed in the same way of registra-

tion. (Refer to page xx.)

Move the cursor to "EDIT" at the lower right on the menu

and press the SET button to complete editing.

ꢀ Level

Select a user level from the following.

Setting of operable functions in each level are

described in "User Level" (Refer to page xx).

LV1/LV2/LV3

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

ꢀ Priority

User Name

ꢀ

Basic Setup

Time

Date

Assign priority (1 (lowest) to 16 (highest) to hosts.

User Password

User Regist.

User Edit

Level

Priority

Default Screen

Camera Partitioning

ꢀ

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

CAM1

ꢀ Default Screen

View/Operate

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM9

View/Operate

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Select a startup display to be displayed after logon

from the following.

SET

CAM 1-16 (for WJ-HD316)/CAM 1-9 (for WJ-HD309):

Displays live images from the selected camera

channel on a single screen.

t [User Delete] Deletion of registered

QUAD 1-4: Displays live images from the camera chan-

nels 1 - 4 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD 5-8: Displays live images from the camera chan-

nels 5 - 8 on a 4-split screen.

QUAD 9-12 (for WJ-HD316)/CAM 9 (for WJ-HD309):

Displays live images from the camera channels 9 -

12 on a 4-split screen. (When WJ-HD309 is used,

live images from only camera channel 9 will be dis-

played on the upper left screen of a 4-split screen.)

QUAD 13-16 (only for WJ-HD316): Displays live

images from the camera channels 13 - 16 on a 4-

split screen.

user

It is possible to delete a registered user.

Move the cursor to "User Name" and rotate the jog dial

to select the user name. Move the cursor to "DELETE"

and press the SET button.

Selected user will be deleted.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

User Name

Basic Setup

ꢀ

Time

Date

DELETE

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

7 SCREEN: Displays images on a 7-split screen.

9 SCREEN 1-9: Displays images from the camera

channels 1 - 9 on a 9-split screen.

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

9 SCREEN 10-16 (only for WJ-HD316): Displays

images from the camera channels 10 - 16 on a 9-

split screen.

10 SCREEN (only for WJ-HD316): Displays images on

a 10-split screen.

13 SCREEN (only for WJ-HD316): Displays images on

a 13-split screen.

16 SCREEN (only for WJ-HD316): Displays images on

a 16-split screen.

SEQ: Images will be displayed in the sequential dis-

play.

y [Host Registration] Registration of

PC (host) accessible to this unit

unit via a network such as LAN.

Move the cursor to "SET" at the lower right on the menu

and press the SET button to complete registration.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

ꢀ Camera Partitioning

LIVE

Host IP Address

Level

Priority

Default Display

Camera Partitioning

ꢀ

000

Basic Setup

Select a controllable range for each camera channel

from the following.

View/Operate: Displaying live images and operating

camera are available.

View: Displaying live images is available but cannot

operate cameras.

Time

Date

User Regist.

User Edit

CAM1

View/Operate

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM9

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

View/Operate

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

SET

--: Both displaying live images and operating camera

are impossible.

116

ꢀ Functions that can be set enable/disable

u [Host Edit] Correction of registered

The following functions can be set enable/disable

according to the user level.

host information

It is possible to edit registered host information.

Move the cursor to "Host IP Address" and rotate the jog

dial to select the host IP address.

Registered information will be displayed.

Editing can be performed in the same way of registra-

tion. (Refer to page xx.)

Move the cursor to "EDIT" at the lower right on the menu

and press the SET button to complete editing.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Host IP Address

Level

Priority

Default Display

Camera Partitioning

ꢀ

000

Basic Setup

Time

Date

User Regist.

User Edit

CAM1

View/Operate

CAM1

CAM2

CAM3

CAM4

CAM5

CAM6

CAM7

CAM8

CAM9

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

View/Operate

CAM10

CAM11

CAM12

CAM13

CAM14

CAM15

CAM16

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

SET

i [Host Delete] Deletion of registered

host

It is possible to delete a registered host.

Move the cursor to "Host Delete" and rotate the jog dial

to select the host. Move the cursor to "DELETE" and

press the SET button.

Selected host will be deleted.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Basic Setup

Host IP Address

0. 0. 0. 0

DELETE

ꢀ

Time

Date Setup

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

o [User Level] Setting of operation

level

Set operable functions at each user level (LV 1/LV 2/

LV 3).

Rotate the jog dial to display "Åõ" to enable operation.

Leave it blank to disable operation.

Refer to the table below for each function.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

SChedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Basic Setup

LV1 LV2 LV3

Time

Date

HJ-HD300 Setup

HJ-HD300 Setup Status

Camera Setup

Event Log Status

Access Log Status

Error Log Status

Alarm Reset

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Alarm Suspend

Copy

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

Normal Recording Erase

Event Recording Erase

Manual REC Operation

Playback Operation

N/W Access

117

Function

Description

HD 300 Setup

The SETUP MENU is displayed and the settings can be performed.

Only SETUP MENU can be displayed. The settings cannot be performed.

The setting menu of camera is displayed and the settings can be performed.

HD 300 Setup reference

Camera Setup

The SETUP MENU is displayed and you can refer the event log. (Refer to page xx.)

Event Log Status

Access Log Status

Error Log Status

Alarm Reset

The SETUP MENU is displayed and you can refer the access log. (Refer to page xx.)

The SETUP MENU is displayed and you can refer the error log. (Refer to page xx.)

An event operation can be canceled. (Refer to page xx.)

Alarm Suspend

An event operation can be suppressed. (Refer to page xx.)

A recorded image can be manually copied. (Refer to page xx.)

Image data in the normal record area of the hard disk can be manually deleted.

Image data in the event recording area of the hard disk can be manually deleted.

Manual recording can be started and stopped.

Copy

Normal Recording Erase

Event Recording Erase

Manual REC Operation

Playback Operation

N/W Access

A recorded image can be played.

This unit can be logged in from a PC via a network.

! [Save/Load] Saving and loading of

settings of the SETUP MENU

It is possible to save the settings of SETUP MENU in

this unit.

It is also possible to call up saved settings. (Load)

Move the cursor to "SAVE" or "LOAD" and press the SET

button.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Basic Setup

User Setup Save

User Setup Load

ꢀ

SAVE

Load

Time

Date

User Regist.

User Edit

User Delete

Host Regist.

Host Edit

Host Delete

User Level

Save/Load

118

DISPLAY SETUP MENU OF CAMERA

For operating the camera connected to this unit, it is required to set the camera function in advance.

Setup of camera function can be performed on the setup menu of the connected camera.

You can operate the camera setup menu by calling up it from this unit. Contents of camera setting menu and operations vary

according to the connected cameras. For further information, refer to the operating instruction of the camera.

The following is the descriptions of how to display the camera setting menu.

Press the camera selection button for a desired camera channel and the SET button simultaneously.

→The camera setup menu will be displayed.

Press any one of the PAN/TILT button, the ZOOM /FOCUS button, the IRIS button and the PRESET/ AUTO button to com-

plete the camera setting.

119

DISK MANAGEMENT

ꢀ Notes on hard disk

Camera images are recorded into the built-in hard disk of

ꢀ How to replace the built-in hard

disk

this unit.

It is possible to replace the hard disk drive regardless of

the power on /off of the unit.

However, the procedures of replacement is different.

Refer to the operating instructions for the extension unit

when replacing the hard disk in the extension unit.

There are two hard disks equipped in this unit. In case that

one of them becomes out of order during recording, it is

possible to keep on recording with another hard disk (mir-

ror function).

The internal hard disk of this unit is virtually divided into 4 to

manage the hard disk.

Normal recording area: An area into which images are

recorded at other than event occurrence such as manu-

al recording.

Event recording area: An area into which images are

recorded at event occurrence.

When replacing the hard disk drive after turn-

ing the power of the unit off

Turn the power of the unit off and detach the power

plug from the outlet.

Copy area: An area into which copy data is stored.

Pre-recording area: An area into which pre-recording

images are recorded.

Do the following to replace the hard disk drive.

1. Open the connectors cover on the front panel and

remove the fixing screws.

It is possible to check the available disk space for each

area on "Disk Info." of "Maintenance" on the SETUP

MENU.(Refer to page xx.)

Detach the front panel by sliding it after removing

the screws.

Operations for the hard disk drive such as initialization (for-

matting) of the hard disk drive in the unit or the extension

unit, or mirroring, etc., can be performed in the "HDD DISK

MENU". (Refer to page xx.)

Note: It is necessary to make either the normal recording

area or the event record area. If the normal recording

area is not created, manual recording images and

scheduled recording images are recorded into the

event recording area. If the event recording area is not

created, event recording images and emergency

recording images are recorded into the normal record-

ing area.

Screw

Terminal cover

Important:

･ Do not detach the cable connecting between the

unit and the front panel while the HDD status indica-

tors are still being lit or until 30 seconds passed

after the HDD status indicators went off.

･ Protect the hard disk drives from static electricity.

･ Do not stack them, nor keep them upright.

･ Do not use electric screwdriver to fix them.

(Tightening torque: Approx. 0.49 N · m (5 kgf · cm))

･ Avoid the rapid change of the temperature/humidity

to prevent condensation. (Acceptable change: with-

in 15 °C/h (59 °F/h))

･ Set all the hard disk drives as master using the

jumper pin.

120

2. Remove the cable from the front panel.

5. Remove the connector from the hard disk drive first,

and then remove the hard disk drive from the hard

disk mounting bracket.

Jumper pin

Front panel

connector

Connector

SSD

3. Remove the screws fixing the mounting unit, and

then pull the mounting bracket toward you.

Hard disk

replacement label

6. Install new hard disk drive in the reverse order of

detaching the hard disk drive.

After replacing the hard disk drive, insert the power

plug into the outlet and turn the power of the unit.

→ The "HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed automati-

cally after the restart.

Screws

4. Remove the screws fixing the hard disk drive.

First, remove the four screws fixing upper side of

the hard disk drive while holding the bottom side of

the hard disk drive to prevent dropping the hard

disk down. Then, remove the four screws fixing the

lower side of the hard disk drive.

Screws

(totally 8 pieces)

Hard disk

mounting angle

SSD

Hard disk

replacement label

121

Replace the hard disk by following the displayed

descriptions.

When replacing the hard disk drive without

turning the power of the unit off

After this step, the following steps are the descriptions

of how to replace the built-in hard disk of this unit.

Refer to the operating instructions of the extension unit

when replacing the hard disk in the extension unit.

Set the unit to the disk maintenance mode using the

"Maintenance" of "Maintenance".

→ The "HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed and the

unit becomes enable to replace hard disk.

Replace the hard disk in the same way as described

from step 2 (1- 6) of “When replacing the hard disk

drive after turning the power of the unit off”.

Maintenance

Switcher

Recording

Display

Event

Com

Schedule

System

SETUP MENU

LIVE

Disk Maintenance

ꢀꢀ

REC Rate Status

Disk Info.

MAIN

EXT7

EXT6

EXT5

EXT4

EXT3

EXT2

EXT1

START

Version. Info.

Disc End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

Press the SET button after completing the replacement

of the hard disk drive.

Maintenance

Event Log

Error Log

When the built-in hard disk drive of this unit or the hard

disk drive of the extension unit in the SINGLE mode is

replaced, restart the unit.

Access Log

After the restart, the "HDD DISK MENU" will be dis-

played automatically.

(When the hard disk drive of the extension unit in the

RAID 5 mode is replaced, this procedure ended in step

5.)

Move the cursor to select the hard disk drive to be

replaced and press the SET button.

→ The descriptions of how to replace the hard disk will

be displayed.

S ET U P

EN U

メンテナンス

スイッチャ

録

表

画

示

イベント動作スケジュール

LIV E

通

信

システム

実行

■ディスクメンテナンスモード

■R A ID ユニットディスク交換

録画レート一覧

ディスク情報

バージョン情報

終端設定

1 . 障害発生ユニットの設置／運用モード

スイッチを「設置」に切り替えてくだ

さい

2 . ディスクを交換してください

残容量警告

3 . 設置／運用モードスイッチを「運用」

に切り替えてください

データ消去

4 . リカバースイッチを押しながらハード

リセットスイッチを押してください

ディスクメンテナンス

5 . 本体前面［セット］キーを押してくだ

さい

イベント入力ログ

障害ログ

アクセスログ

S ET U P

EN U

メンテナンス

スイッチャ

録

表

画

示

イベント動作スケジュール

LIV E

通

信

システム

実行

■ディスクメンテナンスモード

■増設ユニットディスク交換

録画レート一覧

ディスク情報

バージョン情報

終端設定

1 . 増設ユニットの設置／運用モードスイ

ッチを「設置」に切り替えてください

2 . ディスクを交換してください

3 . 設置／運用モードスイッチを「運用」

に切り替えてください

残容量警告

データ消去

4 . ハードリセットスイッチを押してくだ

さい

ディスクメンテナンス

5 . 本体前面［セット］キーを押してくだ

さい

イベント入力ログ

障害ログ

アクセスログ

S ET U P

EN U

メンテナンス

スイッチャ

録

表

画

示

イベント動作スケジュール

LIV E

通

信

システム

実行

■ディスクメンテナンスモード

■本体ハードディスク交換

録画レート一覧

ディスク情報

バージョン情報

終端設定

1 . 前面パネルを外してください

2 . ディスクを交換してください

3 . 前面パネルを接続してください

4 . 本体前面［セット］キーを押してくだ

さい

残容量警告

データ消去

ディスクメンテナンス

イベント入力ログ

障害ログ

アクセスログ

122

ꢀ About the HDD DISK MENU

The operations regarding the hard disk can be performed with displaying the "HDD DISK MENU" on the monitor 2.

The "HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed when the SET button is pressed while displaying the system check complete window.

The "HDD DISK MENU" will also displayed automatically after the replacing or removing the hard disk.

The following operations can be performed on the "HDD DISK MENU".

Setting item

Format

Description

Page

Formats (initializes) the hard disk. It can also change setting values for the

recording area respectively. Mirroring also can be started on this menu.

Mirror recovery

Mirror cancel

Remove Link

Restart

Recovers the mirrored hard disk.

Cancels mirroring.

Removing the hard disk drive from the system logically.

Restarts this unit.

Exit

Close the "HDD DISK MENU".

ꢀ Display of the HDD DISK MENU Disk configuration menu screen

Information of the hard disk drive of the unit or the extension unit will be displayed on the "HDD DISK MENU".

Main unit/extension unit

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

HDD DISK MENU

Format

Mirror ON Mirror OFF Remove Link

Restart

MAIN

120GB M

EXT7

EXT6

120GB

EXT5 120GB

120GB

Information about hard disk located in the main unit and extension unit

EXT4 *(120GB)

*(ERROR)

EXT3 ADD (120GB) ADD (ERROR) 120GB

EXT2 120GB

EXT1 LOST

120GB

[

]

SET : SET

120 GB: Indicates the hard disk capacity (disk existed

when started up last time)

ERROR: Indicates that the hard disk had failed to be initial-

ized.

120 GB M: Indicates the hard disk capacity (mirrored disk

existed when started up last time)

ADD (120 GB): Indicates that this hard disk is newly mount-

ed at this startup, but it was not mounted last time.

Those parenthesized numbers indicate the capacity of

the hard disk.

ADD (ERROR): Indicates that this hard disk is newly

mounted at this startup, but it was not mounted last

time. Then, an error is detected in the hard disk.

* (120 GB): Indicates that a different hard disk from the one

existed at the last startup is mounted. Those parenthe-

sized numbers indicate the capacity of the hard disk.

* (ERROR): Indicates that a different hard disk from the one

existed at the last startup is mounted, and an error is

detected in the hard disk.

Important:

• It is impossible to operate the unit when there is a hard

disk with indications of * (capacity), * (ERROR), LOST

or ERROR. In this case, remove the relevant hard disk.

(Refer to page xx.)

• Hard disks with ADD (capacity) indication are not initial-

ized yet.

First, initialize them. It is impossible to record images on

it nor to use as a copy destination without initialization.

Note: The displayed available disk space on this menu will

not include the space required for data management.

Therefore, the undercounted available disk space will be

displayed. It is possible to display information about the

recording area (allocated disk size for normal recording

area, event recording area, copy area) by pressing the

SEUP/ESC button while displaying the "TOP MENU" of the

"HDD DISK MENU".

LOST: Indicates that a position where a hard disk was

mounted at the last startup has no hard disk.

–: Indicates that a hard disk is not mounted this time as well

as at the last startup.

123

ꢀ RAID 5 Function of the Extension Unit

Summary of RAID 5 function (Redundant

Arrays for Independent Disks, independent

data disks with distributed parity blocks)

ꢀ Setup/cancel the RAID 5 function

Do the followings to set or cancel the RAID 5 function with

an extension unit.

Refer to the operating instruction of the extension unit for

further information.

RAID level 5 regards 3 or more drives as one drive, and it is

possible to read data by attaching error correction data

even though one of the drives is broken automatically. (It is

impossible to read data if 2 or more drives are broken.)

RAID level 5 requires a minimum of 3 drives to implement.

Make sure that the power of this unit and all of the

extension units to be connected are OFF.

When using the RAID function, logical disk size of the

extension unit will be as below.

Logical disk size = Smallest size of the disk among the

disks in the extension unit x (Number of the disks in the

extension unit - 1)

To set the RAID 5 function, set the mode switch of the

extension unit to "RAID 5".

To cancel the RAID 5 function, set the mode switch of

the extension unit to "SINGLE".

Make sure that the HDD POWER switch of the extension

unit is "ON".

Important:

･ When connecting two extension units or more with this

unit, it is impossible to connect the extension unit with

the RAID 5 function and the one without the RAID 5

Turn the power of the extension unit on.

function at the same time.

Turn the power of this unit on.

･ When the RAID 5 function is used, it is impossible to

use two hard disks in this unit. The recorded pictures in

those disks will not be deleted.

→ The "HDD DISK MENU" will be displayed automati-

cally after the system check when the hard disk

configuration had been changed such as when an

extension unit is newly connected.

Important:

• When the RAID 5 function is set or canceled, all data on

each hard disk of the extension unit will be deleted.

• When turning the power on, turn the power of the exten-

sion unit first, and then turn the power of this unit on.

Otherwise, the extension unit may not work correctly.

124

Press the camera selection button ([1]-[10/0]) and type

the password of Admin.

ꢀ Hard Disk Initialization

It is necessary to initialize the hard disk at the following

conditions.

Press the arrows button (C and D ) to move the cursor

to "OK" and press the [SET] button.

• When replacing the hard disk of this unit

• At the first operation after connecting the optional

extension unit to this unit

[Screenshot 3]

The format screen appears.

Important:

If the hard disk is initialized, all of the recorded images

will be deleted.

ꢀ Initialization of all hard disk (unit)

All hard disks including the internal hard disks and the hard

disks in extension units will be initialized. All units will be ini-

tialized at the RAID function activated.

Press the arrows button (A and B ) to move the cursor

to "All Format" and press the [SET] button.

Turn on peripheral devices such as extension unit con-

nected to this unit.

Select "All Unit" at the RAID function activated.

Turn on this unit and press the [SET] button after com-

pletion of system check.

Note:

• If the hard disk is changed or taken out, the top page of

the disk configuration menu automatically appears.

[Screenshot 1]

The top page of the disk configuration menu appears.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

HDD DISK MENU

Format Mirror ON Mirror OFF Remove Link

Restart

[Screenshot 4]

MAIN

120GB M

The setting screen of recording area appears.

EXT7

120GB

EXT6 120GB

EXT5 120GB

EXT4 *(120GB)

120GB

*(ERROR)

EXT3 ADD (120GB) ADD (ERROR) 120GB

EXT2 120GB

EXT1 LOST

120GB

[

]

SET : SET

Press the arrows button (A and B ) to move the cursor

to "Format" and press the [SET] button.

[Screenshot 2]

The password entry screen appears.

m Press the arrows button (A and B ) to select a record-

ing area and rotate the jog dial to set the capacity of

selected recording area.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

HDD DISK MENU

Format Mirror ON Mirror OFF Remove Link

Restart

For deciding the capacity of two or more recording

areas, repeat this procedure.

MAIN 120GB M

EXT7 120GB

EXT6 120GB

EXT5 120GB

EXT4 *(120GB)

120GB M

Input Admin Password

120GB

*(ERROR)

120GB

CANCEL

Press the [SET] button after setting.

EXT3 ADD (120GB) ADD (ERROR) 120GB

EXT2 120GB

EXT1 LOST

120GB

[

]

SET : SET

125

[Screenshot 5]

[Screenshot 2]

The format check screen appears.

The password entry screen appears.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

HDD DISK MENU

Format Mirror ON Mirror OFF Remove Link

Restart

MAIN 120GB M

EXT7 120GB

EXT6 120GB

EXT5 120GB

EXT4 *(120GB)

120GB M

Input Admin Password

120GB

*(ERROR)

120GB

CANCEL

EXT3 ADD (120GB) ADD (ERROR) 120GB

EXT2 120GB

EXT1 LOST

120GB

[

]

SET : SET

Press the arrows button (A and B ) to move the cursor

to "EXECUTE" and press the [SET] button.

→ Formatting starts and the format result screen

appears. The top page of the disk configuration

menu automatically resumes after displaying the for-

mat result screen.

Rotate the jog dial and type the password of Admin.

You can use the camera selection buttons (1-10/0) for

number entry.

Press the arrows button (C and D ) to move the cursor

to "OK" and press the [SET] button.

[Screenshot 3]

ꢀ Initialization of selected hard disk

The format screen appears.

(unit)

You can initialize selected hard disk (unit at the RAID func-

tion activated) by following the procedure below.

Turn on peripheral devices such as extension unit con-

nected to this unit.

Turn on this unit and press the [SET] button after com-

pletion of system check.

Note: If the hard disk changed or taken out, the top

page of the disk configuration menu automatically

appears.

Digital Disk Recorder

HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT

All Unit

One Unit

MAIN

EXT7 120GB

EXT6 120GB

EXT5 120GB

EXT4 *(120GB)

EXT3 ADD (120GB)

EXT2 120GB

[Screenshot 1]

EXT1 LOST

The top page of the disk configuration menu appears.

[

]

SET : SET

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

HDD DISK MENU

Format Mirror ON Mirror OFF Remove Link

Restart

MAIN

120GB M

EXT7

120GB

EXT6 120GB

EXT5 120GB

EXT4 *(120GB)

120GB

Press the arrows button (A and B ) to move the cursor

to "1 Disk Format" and press the [SET] button.

*(ERROR)

EXT3 ADD (120GB) ADD (ERROR) 120GB

EXT2 120GB

EXT1 LOST

120GB

Select "１ユニット" at the RAID function activated.

[

]

SET : SET

Press the arrows button (A and B ) to move the cursor

to "Format" and press the [SET] button.

126

Press the arrows button (A and B ) to select a method

of record area setting from among the following and

press the [SET] button.

[Screenshot 4]

A screen on which you can select a hard disk (unit)

appears.

Auto Setup: Assigns each record area at the same

ratio as the existing hard disks. (→ to step 9)

All Copy Area: Sets the whole selected hard disk (unit)

to a copy area. (→ to step 9)

All Pre REC Area: Sets the whole selected hard disk

(unit) to a pre-record area. (→ to step 10)

Detailed Setup: Sets each record area individually. (→

to step 11)

Important:

If the hard disk of this unit is selected, "All Pre REC

Area" is not selectable.

[Screenshot 6]

The setting screen of each record area appears.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU THE CANDIDATE FOR A FORMAT

Format

Mirror ON Mirror OFF Remove Link

Restart

MAIN 120GB M

EXT7 120GB

EXT6 120GB

EXT5 120GB

EXT4 *(120GB)

120GB M

120GB

m Press the arrows button (A , B , C and D ) to move the

cursor to the hard disk (unit) to be initialized and press

the [SET] button.

*(ERROR)

EXT3 ADD (120GB) ADD (ERROR) 120GB

EXT2 120GB

EXT1 LOST

120GB

[

]

[

]

BACK: BACK SET : SET

[Screenshot 5]

A screen on which you can select a method of capacity set-

ting for recording area appears.

Digital Disk Recorder HDD DISK MENU

WJ-HD300

DISK SELECT

THE SETTING METHOD

Auto Setup All Copy Area All Pre REC Area Detailed Setup

Confirm the capacity of each record area and press the

[SET] button.

→ The format check screen appears.

(→ to step 13)

MAIN

EXT7

120GB

EXT6 120GB

EXT5 120GB

EXT4 *(120GB)

EXT3 ADD (120GB)

EXT2 120GB

EXT1 LOST

[

]

SET : SET

127

[Screenshot 7]

[Screenshot 9]

The setting screen of pre-record area appears.

The format check screen appears.

⁄

0Press the arrows button (A , B , C and D ) to select

camera CH for pre-recording and rotate the jog dial to

decide the capacity of selected pre-record area.

For deciding the capacity of pre-recording with two or

more camera CHs, repeat this procedure.

⁄

3Press the arrows button (A and B ) to move the cursor

to "EXECUTE" and press the [SET] button.

→ Formatting starts and the top page of the disk config-

uration menu resumes.

Press the [SET] button after setting.

→ The format check screen appears. (→ to step 13)

Important:

The camera CH that was already assigned to a pre-

record area with a different hard disk (unit) is not selec-

table.

[Screenshot 8]

The setting screen of record area appears.

⁄

1Press the arrows button (A and B ) to select a record-

ing area and rotate the jog dial to decide the capacity

of selected recording area.

For deciding the capacity of two or more recording

areas, repeat this procedure.

2Press the [SET] button after setting.

128

ꢀ Setting on Mirroring

Mirroring is a function that camera images are recorded

into 2 hard disks simultaneously. In case that one hard disk

fails, normal image data stays in the other hard disk. The

credibility of disk can be enhanced.

Press the camera selection button and type the pass-

word.

Press the arrows button (C and D ) to move the cursor

It is recommended to activate the mirroring function for the

first use of this unit. If the mirroring function is activated

when images are stored in the hard disk, recorded images

will be deleted.

to "OK" and press the [SET] button.

[Screenshot 3]

The format screen appears.

Note: If the hard disk is changed or taken out, the top page

of the disk configuration menu automatically appears.

ꢀ Start of mirroring

You can activate the mirroring function by following the pro-

cedure below.

Turn on this unit and press the [SET] button after com-

pletion of system check.

Note: If the hard disk is taken out, the top page of the

disk configuration menu automatically appears.

Press the arrows button (A and B ) to move the cursor

to "Mirror Format" and press the [SET] button.

[Screenshot 4]

The setting screen of mirror disk record area appears.

[Screenshot 1]

The top page of the disk configuration menu appears.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

HDD DISK MENU

Format Mirror ON Mirror OFF Remove Link

Restart

MAIN

120GB M

EXT7

120GB

EXT6 120GB

EXT5 120GB

EXT4 *(120GB)

120GB

*(ERROR)

EXT3 ADD (120GB) ADD (ERROR) 120GB

EXT2 120GB

EXT1 LOST

120GB

[

]

SET : SET

Press the arrows button (A , B , C and D ) to select a

recording area and rotate the jog dial to set the capaci-

ty of selected recording area.

Press the arrows button (A and B ) to move the cursor

to "Format" and press the [SET] button.

For deciding the capacity of two or more recording

areas, repeat this procedure.

[Screenshot 2]

m Press the [SET] button after setting.

The password entry screen appears.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

HDD DISK MENU

Format Mirror ON Mirror OFF Remove Link

Restart

MAIN 120GB M

EXT7 120GB

EXT6 120GB

EXT5 120GB

EXT4 *(120GB)

120GB M

Input Admin Password

120GB

*(ERROR)

120GB

CANCEL

EXT3 ADD (120GB) ADD (ERROR) 120GB

EXT2 120GB

EXT1 LOST

120GB

[

]

SET : SET

129

Press the arrows button (A and B ) to move the cursor

to "OK" and press the [SET] button.

→ The mirroring function is canceled.

[Screenshot 5]

The format check screen appears.

Note: One of two hard disks that consist of mirroring is

marked with "* (capacity)" on the top page of the

disk configuration menu after mirror cancellation.

ꢀ Hard disk recovery

In case that one hard disk fails while the mirroring function

works or other cases, you can set the disk so that the faulty

disk will be recovered after hard disk replacement.

Press the arrows button (A and B ) to move the cursor

to "EXECUTE" and press the [SET] button.

→ Mirroring starts and the top page of the disk configu-

ration menu resumes.

Turn on this unit and press the [SET] button after com-

pletion of system check.

Note: If the hard disk is changed or taken out, the top

page of the disk configuration menu automatically

appears.

ꢀ Cancel of mirroring

You can cancel the mirroring function by following the pro-

cedure below.

[Screenshot 1]

The top page of the disk configuration menu appears.

Turn on this unit and press the [SET] button after com-

pletion of system check.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

HDD DISK MENU

Note: If the hard disk is taken out, the top page of the

disk configuration menu automatically appears.

Format Mirror ON Mirror OFF Remove Link

Restart

MAIN

120GB M

EXT7

120GB

EXT6 120GB

EXT5 120GB

EXT4 *(120GB)

120GB

*(ERROR)

EXT3 ADD (120GB) ADD (ERROR) 120GB

[Screenshot 1]

EXT2 120GB

EXT1 LOST

120GB

The top page of the disk configuration menu appears.

[

]

SET : SET

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

HDD DISK MENU

Format Mirror ON Mirror OFF Remove Link

Restart

Press the arrows button (A and B ) to move the cursor

MAIN

120GB M

EXT7

120GB

to "Mirror ON" and press the [SET] button.

EXT6 120GB

EXT5 120GB

EXT4 *(120GB)

120GB

*(ERROR)

EXT3 ADD (120GB) ADD (ERROR) 120GB

EXT2 120GB

EXT1 LOST

120GB

[Screenshot 2]

[

]

SET : SET

A message to confirm mirror recovery appears.

Press the arrows button (A and B ) to move the cursor

to "Mirror OFF" and press the [SET] button.

[Screenshot 2]

A message to confirm mirror cancellation appears.

Press the arrows button (A and B ) to move the cursor

to "OK" and press the [SET] button.

Hard disk recovery is executed during operation after

exiting from the disk configuration menu.

130

[Screenshot 3]

ꢀ Logical Delink and

Reconfiguration of Hard Disk

(Remove Link)

The remove link function is executed and the check screen

appears.

Logical delinking of hard disk (Remove Link) is a situation

where a hard disk is not physically removed but a hard disk

is not recognized. You may want to use delinking in the sit-

uation that a hard disk in this unit or an add-on unit fails

(hard disk marked with "*", "LOST" or "ERROR"), and you

would like to disconnect the hard disk temporarily and keep

on operating.

You can activate the delinking function by following the pro-

cedure below.

The top page of the disk configuration menu automati-

cally resumes after completion of remove link.

Turn on this unit and press the [SET] button after com-

pletion of system check.

Note: If the hard disk is taken out, the top page of the

disk configuration menu automatically appears.

[Screenshot 1]

The top page of the disk configuration menu appears.

Digital Disk Recorder

WJ-HD300 TOP MENU

HDD DISK MENU

Format Mirror ON Mirror OFF Remove Link

Restart

MAIN

120GB M

EXT7

120GB

EXT6 120GB

EXT5 120GB

EXT4 *(120GB)

120GB

*(ERROR)

EXT3 ADD (120GB) ADD (ERROR) 120GB

EXT2 120GB

EXT1 LOST

120GB

[

]

SET : SET

Press the arrows button (A and B ) to move the cursor

to "Remove Link" and press the [SET] button.

[Screenshot 2]

A message to confirm delinking appears.

Move the cursor to "OK" and press the [SET] button.

→ The remove link function is executed and the check

screen appears.

131

SERIAL (RS232C) PORT COMMAND REFERENCE

ꢀ SERIAL (RS232C) Communication Protocol

SERIAL (RS232C) means the EIA standard number of an interface for serial data transfer. With the SERIAL (RS232C) interface,

you can control functions of this unit by transferring the specified commands from a personal computer (PC) to this unit.

Notes:

• This unit does not support the communication converted between the SERIAL (RS232C) and USB interface.

• When controlling the unit with the SERIAL (RS232C) interface, the following parameters should be identical between the

communication devices.

The setting is available in "SETUP MENU" – "Communication" – " SERIAL (RS232C) Setting".

Baud Rate

Data Bit

Parity

Stop Bit

ꢀ Command Format

The following pages detail how to write the commands.

1. The following details how to write the commands

Code

ASCII

[STX] AD [Unit address of this unit] [Transmission Command] : [p] [ETX]

(02H) ( ) – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ( ) (03H)

STX: This shows the data start. STX (ASCII code: 02h) is always prefixed to data. h shows hexadecimal digit.

Transmission command: A command shown in the Command List is designated.

ETX: This shows the data end. ETX (ASCII code: 03h) is always prefixed to data.

The character code is ASCII.

When a command needs parameter, colon (:) is used for dividing the command and parameter. The following is how to

write the commands when two or more commands are specified.

Code

[STX] AD [Unit address of this unit] [Transmission Command] : [p1] : [p2] [ETX]

2. Response Command (from the Unit to the PC)

The unit sends back the response command for the transmission command from the PC.

• When the reception was completed successfully

The response command differs between when an ANSWER command (sending back the status or data) is required or

when not required.

• When no ANSWER command is required

The unit sends back the same identifier as that in the transmission command, as shown in the figure.

Transmission command (→ The unit)

Response command (← The unit)

[STX]

OPL

[ETX]

[STX]

OPL

[ETX]

Same identifier

132

• When an ANSWER command is required

The unit sends back the status or data, as shown in the figure.

Transmission command (→ The unit)

Response command (← The unit)

[STX]

QOP

[ETX]

[STX]

OPL

[ETX]

Status inquiry command

Status information command

Transmission command (→ The unit)

Response command (← The unit)

[STX]

QRV

[ETX]

[STX]

QRV:1.01:1.01:1.00:1.10 [ETX]

Version inquiry command

Sends back data.

• About ACK code

After receiving an command from the PC, the unit sends back the ACK code to the PC in 20 ms or less.

[ACK] = Reception succeeded (ASCII code: 06H)

After the ACK code sending back and the command processing has completed, the unit sends back the response com-

mand to the PC.

Example:

These are examples for the following operations.

1. Login with the user name of "ADMIN" and with password of "12345".

2. Display images from the camera channel 1 on the monitor 2.

3. Start playback from the point of January 1 2003, 3:00 p.m.

4. Logout

(1) (This unit -> PC) Login

[STX]AD001;OLI:ADMIN[SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP]

[SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP]:12345[SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP]

[SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP] [SP][ETX]

When receiving the command above, this unit will start the login procession of the user name of "ADMIN".

(2) (This unit -> PC) Response against (1).

[STX]AD001;OLI:1[ETX]

(3) (PC -> This unit) Select the monitor 2

[STX]AD001;OMS:001[ETX]

(4) (This unit -> PC) Response against (3).

[STX]AD001;OLI:1[ETX]

(5) (PC -> This unit) Display images from the camera channel 1.

[STX]AD001;OCS:00001[ETX]

(6) (This unit - > PC) Response against (5).

[STX]AD001;OCS:00002[ETX]

(7) (PC -> This unit) Playback from the designated time point.

[STX]AD001;ZTP:20030101150000[ETX]

When receiving the command above, this unit will start playback from the point of January 1 2003, 3:00 p.m.

(8) (This unit - > PC) Response against (7).

[STX]AD001;ZTP: 200301011500000[ETX]

133

(9) (PC -> This unit) Logout.

[STX]AD001;OLO [ETX]

When receiving the command above, the user logged in via serial (RS232C) (ADMIN) will logout.

(10)

(This unit - > PC) Response against (9).

[STX]AD001;OLO[ETX]

Note: The character code of [STX], [ETX] and [SP] are as follows.

[STX]: 02h

[ETX]: 03h

[SP] (space): 20h

3. Reception Error

The response command differs between the reception error and parameter error.

• Communication error (Reception error)

When the unit cannot properly receive the command due to the communication error, the unit immediately sends back the

NACK code to the PC. After clearing the receive buffer, the unit enters the wait state until receiving the following [STX]

command.

[NCK] = Reception failed (ASCII code: 15H)

Reason for the communication error

1: Parity error (ASCII code: 31H)

2: Framing error (ASCII code: 33H)

3: Overrun error (ASCII code: 34H)

• Parameter error

When the unit cannot properly process the received command, the unit sends back an error code to the PC. After clearing

the receive buffer, the unit enters the wait state until receiving the following [STX] command.

[ETX]

=Error

Reason for the error

001: Command invalid (There is no associated command.)

002: Parameter invalid (The number, digit, or range of the command

parameters is incorrect.)

003: Command invalid (The unit does not support the operation mode.)

E: Command error (ASCII code: 45H)

• If the unit receives another command during the response, the unit will respond to the command after processing the cur-

rent response.

• If the unit received the [STX] command again before receiving the [ETX] command, the unit will clear the internal buffer.

Then, the unit will process the data following to the [STX] command. (The commands received before the second [STX]

command will be canceled.)

• The internal buffer will be cleared when it fills up.*

134

4. PC Connection Example

RS-232C crossing cable is used for connection between the unit and PC. (Refer to the following page for cable specification.)

D-sub Pin 9

SIGNAL GND

MODE

COPY

SERIAL

ALARM

CASCADE

OUT

POWER

AC IN

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

MONITOR OUT CASCADE IN

MONITOR (VGA)

ALARM/CONTOROL

DATA

RS485(CAMERA)

10/100BASE-T EXT STORAGE

Personal compute

OUT

VIDEO

This unit

WJ-HD316 Rear View

Pin No. Signal Name

I/O

Cross cable connection example

TXD

RXD

DTR

OUT

–

WJ-HD316

PC or another device

DSR

RTS

CTS

OUT

Frame

Shield

135

ꢀ Command Table

Basic Operation

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Forward a field

Rewind a field

Pause during playback

Play

OVF

OVR

OPA

OPL

ORC

OVF

OVR

OPA

OPL

Manual recording

ORC

ZMR:nn

...

Manual recording with

text

ZMR:nn:ddd ddd

nn=01~99 (Sequence number)

...

ddd ddd: text (200 bytes or less)

Stop

OSP:n

OSP

OSF

n=P: Stops PLAY

n=R: Stops REC

no parameter stops PLAY and REC

n=0F Normal speed

n=1F x2 speed

Skip & play forward

OSF:n

n=2F x5 speed

n=3F x10 speed

n=4F x20 speed

n=5F x50 speed

n=6F x100 speed

n=0S Normal speed

n=1S 1/2 speed

Skip&play rewind

OSR:n

OSR

n=0F Normal speed

n=1F x2 speed

n=2F x5 speed

n=3F x10 speed

n=4F x20 speed

n=5F x50 speed

n=6F x100 speed

n=0S Normal speed

n=1S 1/2 speed

Record No. Search and

playback

ZPR:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr:mm

ZTP:yyyymmdhhnnss

OSK:dnn

ZPR:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr

ZTP:yyyymmdhhnnss

OSK

rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrÅFRecord No.

Time & date search and

playback

yyyymmdhhnnss:Time & date of playback

image

Record skip

d=+ Forward

– Backward

nn=01 Number of skipped records: Fixed

LISTED Playback

ZLT:n

ZPM

ZLT:n

n=0 OFF

n=1 ON

Playback latest image

A - B repeat playback

ZPM

ZRP:n

ZRP:n:yyyymmddhhnnss

n=0 A - B repeat playback OFF

n=1 Set repeat start point (A point)

n=2 Set repeat end point (B point)

yyyymmddhhnnss: Date and time of A / B point

n=0 COPY SETUP MENU OFF

Display COPY SETUP

ZPD:n

ZDT:n

OTC:m

ZPD:n

ZDT:n

OTC:m

n=1 COPY SETUP MENU ON

Display text

n=0 Text display OFF

n=1 Text display ON

Multiscreen segment

switching

m=0 4 segments

m=1 7 segments

m=2 9 segments

m=3 10 segments

m=4 13 segments

m=5 16 segments

nnnn=0001 Select MON 1

nnnn=0002 Select MON 2

Monitor selection

Camera selection

OMS:nnnn

OCS:ccccc

OMS:nnnn

OCS:ccccc

ccccc: Camera CH

136

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Electronic zooming

OZM:m

OZM:n

m=0 Electronic zooming OFF

m=1 Electronic zooming ON

m=> Switch x2 -> x4

m=< Switch x4 -> x2

m=+ Switch Electronic zooming OFF -> x2 ->

x4 -> Electronic zooming OFF -> ...

m=- Switch x4 -> x2 -> Electronic zooming OFF

-> x4 -> ...

n=0 Electronic zooming OFF

n=2 x2

n=4 x4 tem

Start sequence

Stop sequence

Disk selection

OQT:01F

OQS:0

ZDS:k

OQT:01F:01

OQS

ZDS:k

k=0 HDD normal/event recording sector

k=1 HDD copy sector

k=2 Disk connected to COPY 1

k=3 Disk connected to COPY 2)

Marking

ZMP

Alarm Control

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Alarm input

OAI:b₁b₂b₃a₁a₂a₃a₄

OAI

b₁b₂b₃: Head alarm CH information (binary)

a₁a₂a₃a₄: Alarm CH information (binary)

Alarm input with text

ZAI:b₁b₂b₃a₁a₂a₃a₄:

nn:ddd ddd

ZAI:nn

b₁b₂b₃: Head alarm CH information (binary)

a₁a₂a₃a₄: Alarm CH information (binary)

nn=01 - 99 (Sequence No)

...

ddd ddd: text (200 bytes or less)

Alarm reset

OAL;n

MAD:n

–

OAL

n=0 Alarm all reset

n=1 Alarm reset

Alarm suspension

MAD:n

ALD:n

n=0 Alarm suspension OFF

n=1 Alarm suspension ON)

Alarm change information

(LED indication)

n=0 LED OFF

n=1 LED ON

n=2 LED Blinking

Alarm change information

–

ALM: b₁b₂b₃a₁a₂a₃a₄

b1b2b3: Head alarm CH information (binary)

a1a2a3a4: Alarm CH information (binary)

Setup Control

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Display SETUP MENU

MSU:n

n=0 SETUP MENU OFF

n=1 SETUP MENU ON

Move cursor

DCR:n1n2

DCR

n1n2=A1 Right

n1n2=C1 Upward

n1n2=E1 Left

n1n2=G1 Downward

n1n2=+1 Increment parameter (+)

n1n2=-1 Decrement parameter (–)

n1n2=PD Move to virtual menu (SET)

n1n2=P- Go back to an older page (BACK)

n1n2=PU Move to upper layer (ESC)

Date & Time setup

Summer time setup

Recording mode setup

TSU:yyyymmddhhnn

MST:n

TSU

yyyymmddhhnn: Date and time

MST

MRM

n=0 Standard timen=1 Summer time

MRM:n

n=0 Normal recording mode

n=2 Continuous (External timer) recording

mode

Log-in/Log-out

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Log-in

OLI:uuu...uuu:

ppp ppp

OLI:n

uuu...uuu: User name (32-byte fixed length)

ppp...ppp: Password (32-byte fixed length)

n=0 Error in user name/password

n=1 Login succeeded

...

n=2 Login failed

Log-out

OLO

137

Data Control

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Copy by specifying

record

ZCR:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr:m

ZCR

rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: Record No.

m=0 Copy to HDD copy sector

m=1 Copy to media connected to COPY 1

m=2 Copy to media connected to COPY 2

Copy by specifying date ZCT:y₁y₁y₁y₁m₁m₁d₁d₁

ZCT

y₁y₁y₁y₁m₁m₁d₁d₁h₁h₁n₁n₁: Start date & time of

data copy

y₂y₂y₂y₂m₂m₂d₂d₂h₂h₂n₂n₂: End date & time of

data copy

& time

h₁h₁n₁n₁:y₂y₂y₂y₂m₂m₂

d₂d₂h₂h₂n₂n₂:s:ccc:m

s=0 Format to specify the camera CH. Fixed to

ccc: Camera CH No. of target for data copy

m=0 Copy to HDD copy sector

m=1 Copy to media connected to COPY 1

m=2 Copy to media connected to COPY 2

Data copy completed

–

ZEC:y₁y₁y₁y₁m₁m₁d₁d₁

h₁h₁n₁n₁:

y₁y₁y₁y₁m₁m₁d₁d₁h₁h₁n₁n1 Start date & time of

data copy

y₂y₂y₂y₂m₂m₂d₂d₂h₂h₂

n₂n₂:s:ccc:m

y₂y₂y₂y₂m₂m₂d₂d₂h₂h₂n₂n₂End date & time of

data copy

s=0 Format to specify the camera CH. Fixed to

ccc: Camera CH No. of target for data copy

m=0 Copy to HDD copy sector

m=1 Copy to media connected to COPY 1

m=2 Copy to media connected to COPY 2

Cancel data copy

Erase log

ZDC

ZLC:k

k=1 Event input log

k=2 Trouble log

k=3 Access log

Log data total number

inquiry

ZLQ:k:y₁y₁y₁y₁m₁m₁d₁d₁

h₁h₁n₁n₁:y₂y₂y₂y₂m₂m₂

d₂d₂h₂h₂n₂n₂

ZLQ:k:y₁y₁y₁y₁m₁m₁

d₁d₁h₁h₁n₁n₁

y₂y₂y₂y₂m₂m₂

k=0 Record list

k=1 Event input log

k=2 Trouble log

d₂d₂h₂h₂n₂n₂:dddddddd

k=3 (Access log)

y₁y₁y₁y₁m₁m₁d₁d₁h₁h₁n₁n₁: Start date & time of

inquiry range

y₂y₂y₂y₂m₂m₂d₂d₂h₂h₂n₂n₂: End date & time of

inquiry range

dddddddd: Log data total number

Log readout

ZLR:yyyymmdd

hhnn:mmmmmmmm

ZLR:k:<Log Data

1>s1:<Log Data

2>s2: :<Log Data

k=1 (Event inut log)

k=2 (Trouble log)

k=3 (Access log)

...

n>sn

yyyymmddhhnn Start date & time of readout

logs

mmmmmmmm: Total number of acquired logs

(00000000 - 00000050)

<Log Data n>: Log data

sn: 0-9 Cyclic number

Record list acquisition

ZGR:yyyymmddnn

:nnnnnnnn

ZGR<Log Data

1>s1:<Log Data

2>s2: :<Log Data n>sn

yyyymmddhhnn: Start date & time of readout

list

mmmmmmmm: Total record number in the

acquired list (00000001 - 00000050)

<Log Data n>: Log data

...

sn: 0-9 Cyclic number

Text acquisition

Text writing

ZGT:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr

ZGT:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: <TEXT>

ZPT:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr

rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: Record No.

<TEXT>: text data

ZPT:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: <TEXT>

rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: Record No.

<TEXT>: text data 200 bytes or less

Disk End Notification

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Disk end auto-notification MDE:n

setting

MDE:n

n=0 (Auto-notification OFF)

n=1 (Auto-notification ON)

Disk end auto-notification HDE:–

HDE:p

p=1 (Normal recording sector)

p=2 (Event recording sector)

p=3 (Copy sector)

138

Search Operation

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

ZTL:n ZTL:n

Parameter (ASCII)

Display search editing

area

n=0 (Search editing area OFF)

n=1 (Recording event search list ON)

n=2 (Recording event search thumbnail ON)

n=3 (VMD search list ON)

n=4 (VMD Search Thumbnail OFF)

n=5 (Marking search list ON)

n=6 (Maring search thumbnail ON)

n=7 (Search playback display ON)

Display Operation

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

DIN:n DIN

Parameter (ASCII)

Switch display

n=+

Inqury

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Additional disk space

inquiry

QHR:p

QHR:p:sss

p=1 HDD normal recording sector

p=2 HDD event recording sector

p=3 HDD copy sector

p=4 Disk connected to COPY 1

p=5 Disk connected to COPY 2

sss: Additional disk space (%)

ID request

QID

QIB

QIC

QID:WJ-HD309

QID:WJ-HD316

Interface ID request

QIB:WJ-HD309

QIB:WJ-HD316

Production category

request

QIC:2

Alarm information request QLD:0

QLD:n

n=0 (No alarm)

n=1 (Alarm end)

n=2 (Under alarm operation)

Software version inquiry

Status inquiry

QRV

QSR

QRV:n.nn

n.nn: Software version

...

QSR:Status 1:Status 2

Following response commands are sends back

...

for "Status 1:Status 2

msu:0 Under normal operation

msu:1 Under setting

oms:0001 Monitor 1

oms:0002 Monitor 2

ocs:ccccc ccccc: Camera number

otc:n Multiscreen segment display pettern

n=0: 4 segments

n=1: 7segments

n=2: 9 segments

n=3: 10 segments

n=4: 13 segments

n=5: 16 segments

oqt:01F Sequence activated

ozm:0 Zoom OFF

ozm:2 x2 zoom

ozm:4 x4 zoom

mad:0 Alarm suspension OFF

mad:1 Alarm suspension ON

zcd: Cascade activated

zqs: 1 CH recording activated:2 CH recording

...

activated 16 CH recording activated

Recording status nn=00 (Recording stop)

nn=01 (Manual recording activated)

nn=02 (Event recording activated)

nn=03 (Schedule recording activated)

nn=04 (Emergency recording activated)

139

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

zqm: Monitor status: camera CH: Playback

time

Monitor status n=0 Live

n=1 Live sequence

n=2 Playback

n=3 Other statuses

Camera CH

Playback time: yyyymmddhhnnss

ztl:n Search editing area ON

n=0 Search editing area OFF

n=1 Recording event search list ON

n=2 Recording event search thumbnail

n=3 VMD search list ON

n=4 VMD search thumbnail ON

n=5 Marking search list ON

n=6 Marking search thumbnail ON

n=7 Search playback display ON

zdt:0 Text display OFF

zdt:1 Text display ON

Recording mode inquiry

Monitor status inquiry

QRM

ZQM

QRM:n

n=0 Normal recording mode

n=2 Continuous (External timer) recording

mode

ZQM:m:a₁a₂a₃a₄:yyyy

mmddhhnnss

m=0 Live

m=1 Live sequence

m=2 Playback

m=3 Other statuses

a₁a₂a₃a₄: Camera CH information (binary)

yyyymmddhhnnss: Playback time

Recording status inquiry

ZQS

ZQS:1 CH recording activated: Recording status nn=00 (Recording stop)

...

2 CH recording activated 16

nn=01 (Manual recording activated)

nn=02 (Event recording activated)

nn=03 (Schedule recording activated)

nn=04 (Emergency recording activated)

CH recording activated

Record number informa-

tion

–

ZRN:sss:nn:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr

:nnyyyymmddhhnnss:

ccc:x;yyy:t

sss: Unit address

nn=Sequence number

rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: Record number

yyyymmddhhnnss: Recording event date and

time

ccc: Camera CH

x=0 Manual recording

x=1 Schedule recording

x=2 VMD recording

x=3 Alarm port recording

x=4 Command alarm recording

x=5 VIDEO LOSS recording

x=6 Emergency recording

yyy: Event-activated CH

t=0 Text included

t=1 Text not included

nn=Sequence number

Camera SYNC status

inquiry

QSY:a1a2a3a4a5

:b1b2b3b4b5

QSY:a₁a₂a₃a₄a₅

b₁b₂b₃b₄b₅:s₁s₂s₃sm

a₁a₂a₃a₄a₅- b₁b₂b₃b₄b₅: Range of camera CH

to inquire SYNC status

s₁s₂s₃sm: SYNC status of each camera

...

(s_m=0: SYNC status not found

s_m=1: SYNC status found)

140

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

Record information

inquiry

ZGP:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr

ZGP:rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr:

ccc:q:nnnn:yyyymmdd

hhnnss:nnss:t:ssssss

rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr: Record number

ccc: Camera CH

q: picture quality (0 (VeryFine), 1 (Fine), 2

(Normal), 3 (Extended))

nnnn: Recording rate

yyyymmddhhnnss: Recording start date and

time

nnss: Recording total time

t=0 Text included

t=1 Text not included

ssssss: Record size [KB]

Communication

Item

Transmission command (ASCII) Response command (ASCII)

Parameter (ASCII)

RCK

Communication check

RCK

141

Flowchart of the SETUP MENU

Maintenance

REC Rate Status

Recording

REC Setup

Event

Event Setup

Schedule

Time Table

Event Setup

VMD

Maintenance

Disk Info.

Recording

Emergency REC

Schedule

REC PROGRAM

Event Setup

Video Loss

REC PROGRAM

Recording Program

Maintenance

Version info.

Schedule

EVENT PROGRAM

Event Setup

Terminal Command

Alarm

EVENT PROGRAM

Event Program

Event

VMD Setup

Event Program

VMD

Maintenance

Disk End Mode

VMD Area Setup

For each camera

Event Program

Video Loss

Event

Alarm Setup

Maintenance

Disk Capacity

Event Program

Terminal/Command

Alarm

Event

Terminal Setup

Maintenance

Disk Delete

Schedule

Special Days

Maintenance

Event Log

Maintenance

Error Log

Maintenance

Access Log

Maintenance

Monitor 1

Display

OSD Setup

Com

Camera Control

System

Basic Setup

OSD Setup

Monitor 1

Camera Title

Live Sequence

Maintenance

Monitor 2

Display

Monitor 1

Com

PS·Data Setup

System

Time & Date

Monitor 2

PS·Data Setup

Time & Date

Live Sequence

Camera Number Setup

Summer Time

(Day Light Saving)

Table

Display

Monitor 2

Com

RS485 Setup

System

User Regist.

RS485 Setup

Control Camera CH

Com

System

RS232 Setup

User Edit

Com

System

NW Setup 1

User Delete

Com

System

NW Setup 2

Host Regist.

Com

System

NTP Setup

Host Edit

System

Host Delete

System

User Level

System

Save/Load

142

Parameters and the default settings of the SETUP MENU

These are the setting parameters and the default settings of the items on the SETUP MENU.

Refer to these as reference.

Setup Menu

Setup Item

Parameter

Default Setting

Maintenance

Disk Info.

Warning for Disk Life Time

HDD Safety Mode

Normal Recording Area

Event Recording Area

Copy Area

10000h/20000h/30000h

ON/OFF

30000h

Disk End Mode

Disk Capacity

Data Delete

CONTINUE/STOP

OFF/1%/2%/･･･/10%

CONTINUE

STOP

10%

COPY1

COPY2

Normal Recording Area

Event Recording Area

Copy Area

10%

COPY1

10%

COPY2

10%

Auto Delete

OFF/1DAY/2DAYS/….../10DAYS/14DAYS/

30DAYS/45DAYS/60DAYS/90DAYS/

120DAYS/150DAYS/180DAYS

OFF

Recording

REC Setup

Recording Action

ON/OFF

Power ON Manual REC

Manual Recording Channel

Color Mode

ON/OFF

OFF

MON2/ALL

ALL

COLOR FINE/COLOR STD/ B/W

ON/OFF

COLOR STD

Embedded REC(Title)

Embedded REC(Time & Date) ON/OFF

REC Priority

Manual REC/Scheduled REC/Event REC

1: Manual REC

2: Event REC

3: Scheduled REC

Audio Allocation

HD316: OFF/CAM1/CAM2.....CAM16

HD309: OFF/CAM1/.....CAM9

AUDIO1 to 4: OFF

FIELD

Emergency REC

Resolution

FRAME 3D ON/FRAME 3D OFF/FIELD/SIF

Recording Time

1 s/2s/..../10s/20s/30s/1m/2m/..../10m/20m

/30m/40m/50m/60m/MANUAL/CONTINUE

10s

Recording Rate and Quality

Recording rate: 1ips/2ips/3ips/5ips/6ips/

7.5ips/10ips/15ips/30ips/60ips

Quality: SFA/SFB/FQA/FQB/NQA/NQB/

EXA/EXB

Recording rate: 3ips

Quality: SFA

OFF

Auto Copy

OFF/ON

143

Setup Menu

Setup Item

Parameter

Default Setting

Event

Event Setup

Alarm Output

OFF/1s/2s/...../30s/40s/50s/1m/

2m/...../5m/EXT

VMD: OFF

Video Loss: 2s

Terminal Command Alarm: 2s

Output Terminal

Buzzer

HD316: TRM1/TRM2/...../TRM16

HD309: TRM1/TRM2/...../TRM9

OFF/1s/2s/...../30s/40s/50s/1m/2m/...../5m/EXT

VMD: OFF

Video Loss: 2s

Terminal Command Alarm: 2s

Monitor1 Action

HD316: OFF/CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM16

HD309: OFF/CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM9

VMD: OFF

Video Loss: Camera channel with a video

loss occurrence

Terminal Command Alarm: Same number

for camera channel number and alarm

number

Monitor2 Action

HD316: OFF/CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM16

HD309: OFF/CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM9

VMD: OFF

Video Loss: Camera channel with a video

loss occurrence

Terminal Command Alarm: Same number

for camera channel number and alarm

number

VMD Setup

(SETUP AREA)

(SETUP ALL AREA)

(DELETE AREA)

(DELETE ALL AREA)

(SENSITIVITY)

(VMD MODE)

(EXIT)

Alarm Setup

Alarm Auto Reset

Alarm Disarm Time

OFF/1s/2s/...../30s/40s/50s/1m2/3m/4m/5m

2s/3s/...../10s

OFF

Terminal Setup

Period

N.O./N.C.

N.O.

Schedule

Time Table

12:00AM to 12:00AM

12:00AM to 12:00AM (Everyday/Time

zone1)

--:-- to --:-- (Except above)

REC PROG

PROG1/PROG2/PROG3/PROG4

ON/OFF

PROG1

OFF

EVENT PROG

FTP SEND BY PERIODIC

TIMER

ERROR REPORT MAIL

ON/OFF

OFF

WARNING REPORT MAIL

NW BANDWIDTH CONTROL

OFF/32kbps/64kbps/128kbps/256kbps/

512kbps/1024kbps /2Mbps/5Mbps/10Mbps

Resolution

RATE

FRAME 3D ON/FRAME 3D OFF/FIELD/FRAME

FIELD

REC PROGRAM

OFF/2ips/3ips/5ips/6ips/7.5ips/10ips/15ips/

30ips/60ips

Manual REC: 15 ips

Scheduled REC: 15 ips

Event REC: 30 ips

RATE

OFF/AUTO/0.1ips/0.2ips/0.3ips/0.4ips/0.5ips/

1ips/2ips/3ips/5ips/6ips/7.5ips/10ips/15ips/3

0ips/60ips

MANUAL: AUTO

SCHEDULED: AUTO

EVENT (PRE): 1ips

EVENT (POST): 1ips

QUALITY

SFA/SFB/FQA/FQB/NQA/NQB/EXA/EXB

SFA

DURATION (TIME for the unit) 1s/2s/...../10s/20s/30s/1m/2m,/...../10m/20m/

...../60m/MANUAL/CONTINUE

EVENT (PRE): 10s

EVENT (POST): 30s

144

Setup Menu

Setup Item

Parameter

Default Setting

EVENT PROGRAM Action Mode (The unit)

ALM/ADM

ALM

Mode (NW)

REC CH

ON/OFF

OFF

Auto Copy

ON/OFF

Preset Position

Serial Notice

Mail Notice

--/1/2/...../64

ON/OFF

OFF

ON/OFF

FTP Alarm Sending

ON/OFF

Special Days

DATE

Mode

1/1 to 12/31

MON/TUE/WED/THU/FRI/SAT/SUN

Switcher

Monitor1

Live Sequence

[Operating with the buttons of the unit]

1/2/...../15/16/1-4/5-8/9-12/13-16/1-9/10-16/--

[Operating via a network]

HD316: STEP1: CAM1,

STEP2: CAM2, ...... STEP16: CAM16

HD309: STEP1: CAM1,

CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/--

STEP2: CAM2, ...... STEP9:CAM9

--/1/2/...../64

1s/2s/...../30s

Sequence Timing

Auto Skip

INT/EXT/MON2

ON/OFF

INT

OFF

CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/7SCREEN/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/10SCREEN/13SCREEN/

16SCREEN/SEQ/--

16SCREEN

Secret View

ON/OFF

OFF

Monitor2

Live Sequence

[Operating with the buttons of the unit]

1/2/...../15/16/1-4/5-8/9-12/13-16/1-9/10-16/--

[Operating via a network]

HD316: STEP1: CAM1,

STEP2: CAM2, .....STEP16:CAM16

HD309: STEP1: CAM1,

CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/--

STEP2: CAM2, ..... STEP9:CAM9

--/1/2/...../64

1s/2s/...../30s

Sequence Timing

Auto Skip

INT/EXT

INT

ON/OFF

OFF

CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD1-4

CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/7SCREEN/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/10SCREEN/13SCREEN/

16SCREEN/SEQ/--

Display

OSD Setup

Time & Date Display Position

Camera Title Display Position

L-UPPER/R-UPPER/L-LOWER/R-LOWER

L-UPPER

R-LOWER

L-UPPER/R-UPPER/L-LOWER/R-LOWER/

CENTER

Line Color on the Multi Screen WHITE/GRAY/BLACK

WHITE

Monitor1

Monitor2

Time & Date Display

Camera Title Display

Alarm Display

ON/OFF

Style of Screen

STYLE1/STYLE2/STYLE3

UPPER/LOWER

STYLE1

LOWER

T&D and Status Display

Position

Camera Title Display

ON/OFF

145

Setup Menu

Setup Item

Parameter

Default Setting

Com

Camera Control

COMP

TYPE

S/M/L

HD316: CAM1to CAM8: S

HD309: CAM1 to CAM6: S

HD316: CAM1 to CAM8: COAX/RS485/OFF,

CAM9 to CAM12: RS485/PSD/OFF,

CAM13 to CAM16: RS485/PSD/OFF

HD309: CAM1 to CAM6: COAX/RS485/OFF,

CAM7 to CAM9: RS485/PSD/OFF

HD316: CAM1 to CAM8: COAX,

CAM9 to CAM12: RS485,

CAM13 to CAM16: RS485

HD309: CAM1 to CAM6: COAX,

CAM7 to CAM9: RS485

PS·Data Setup

Unit Address(System)

Unit Address(Controller)

Cascade

001 to 099

001

OFF

9600

001 to 099

ON/OFF

Baud Rate

2400/4800/9600/19200/38400

Data Bit

Parity

NONE/EVEN/ODD

NONE

Stop Bit

1/2

Retry Timing

Alarm Data

OFF/100ms/200ms/400ms/1000ms/

OFF/0s/1s/5s

OFF

Camera Number Setup

001 to 128

HD316: 1: 001 to 16: 016

HD309: 1: 001 to 9: 009

RS485 Setup

Baud Rate

4800/9600/19200

PORT1/PORT2

9600

Control Camera CH

HD316: CAM1 to CAM8: PORT1,

CAM9 to CAM16: PORT2

HD309: CAM1 to CAM9: PORT1

Data Bit

Parity

NONE

Stop Bit

RS232C Setup

NW Setup1

NW Setup2

Unit Address(System)

Baud Rate

Data Bit

001 to 099

001

9600/19200/38400

9600

7/8

Parity

NONE/EVEN/ODD

NONE

Stop Bit

1/2

Retry Timing

HTTP Port Number

User Authentication

Host Authentication

Line Speed

Live Video Quality

Video Rate

DHCP

OFF/100ms/200ms/400ms/1000ms/

OFF

00000 to 65535

00080

ON/OFF

OFF

ON/OFF

OFF

AUTO

FQB

FAST/MIDDLE/SLOW/VERY SLOW

MIDDLE

ON/OFF

OFF

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

192.168.0.250

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

255.255.255.000

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

192.168.000.001

DNS

ON/OFF

OFF

Primary

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

000.000.000.000

Secondary

DDNS

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

000.000.000.000

ON/OFF

OFF

User Name

User Password

Access Interval

Host Name

10m/30m/1h/6h/24h

HD316: HD316

HD309: HD309

Domain Name

localdomain

146

Setup Menu

Setup Item

Parameter

Default Setting

Network SNMP

Setup

COMMUNITY

public

CONTACT

SYSTEM NAME

LOCATION

NTP Setup

Time Adjustment

Time Zone

ON/OFF

OFF

GMT-12:00/GMT-11:00/...../GMT-4:00/GMT-3:30/

GMT-3:00/...../GMT-1:00/GMT 0:00/GMT+1:00/

GMT+2:00/...../GMT+9:00/GMT+9:30/

GMT+10:00/...../GMT+13:00

GMT-5:00

NTP Server Address

Refresh Interval

FTP Server Address

User Name

1h/2h/6h/12h/24h

Network FTP Setup

User Password

Mode

SEQUENCIAL/PASSIVE

SEQUENCIAL

Server Directory

File Name

TIME & DATE BASE/SERIAL NUMBER

TIME & DATE BASE

Interval

01s

Channel to Send

Server Directory

File Name

CAM1 to CAM16

TIME & DATE BASE/SERIAL NUMBER

TIME & DATE BASE

Duration-Pre

Duration-Post

OFF/1s/2s/3s/4s/5s/6s/7s/8s/9s/10s

OFF

OFF/1s/2s/3s/4s/5s/6s/7s/8s/9s/10s

Network Mail Setup Attach Alarm Image

Mail Server Address

Send to

ON/OFF

OFF

Address1

From Address

POP before SMTP

POP Server Address

User Name

ON/OFF

OFF

User Password

System

Basic Setup

ADMIN Password

PSD User

12345

ADMIN

Auto Login

ON/OFF

Auto Login User

Auto Logout

Priority

ADMIN

ON/OFF

OFF

A priority is followed./Pre-priority/Post-priority

5s/10s/30s/1m/5m

A priority is followed.

"GO TO LAST" before

Language

JAPANESE/ENGLISH/FRANÇAIS/ESPAÑOL/

DEUTSCH/ITALIANO

ENGLISH

Beep (Operation)

Buzzer (Alarm)

Shutdown Time

Auto Copy

ON/OFF

OFF/1s/...../30s/40s/50s/1m/...../5m/EXT

10s/20s/30s/1m/2m/3m/4m/5m

ON/OFF

10s

OFF

147

Setup Menu

Setup Item

Parameter

Default Setting

Time & Date

Date Format

Time Format

Auto Adjust Time

Master Time

YY.MM.DD/MMM.DD.YY/DD.MMM.YY

MMM.DD.YY

12h

24h/12h

ON/OFF

OFF

0:00/1:00/...../23:00

0:00

Summer Time(Day Light Saving) ON/OFF/AUTO

Summer Time(Day Light Saving)

OFF

Table

User Regist.

User Edit

User Name

Password

Level

User Delete

1/2/3

1/2/...../16

Priority

Default Screen

CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/7SCREEN/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/10SCREEN/13SCREEN/

16SCREEN/SEQ

CAM1

Camera Partitioning

Host IP Address

Level

--/ View/ View/Operate

View/Operate

Host Regist.

Host Edit

1/2/3

1/2/...../16

Host Delete

Priority

Default Screen

CAM1/CAM2/...../CAM16/QUAD1-4/QUAD5-8/

QUAD9-12/QUAD13-16/7SCREEN/9SCREEN1-9/

9SCREEN10-16/10SCREEN/13SCREEN/

16SCREEN/SEQ

CAM1

Camera Partitioning

WJ-HD300 Setup

WJ-HD300 Setup Status

Camera Setup

--/ View/ View/Operate

LV1,LV2,LV3

View/Operate

LV1

User Level

LV1,LV2

LV1

Event Log Status

Access Log Status

Error Log Status

LV1,LV2

LV1

Alarm Reset

Alarm Suspended Time

Copy

LV1

Normal Recording Erase

Event Recording Erase

Manual REC Operation

Playback Operation

N/W Access

LV1

LV1,LV2

LV1,LV2,LV3

148

TROUBLESHOOTING

Check to see the following before request for repair.

Contact your dealer if a trouble cannot be removed even after checking and trying remedy.

Check item/Remedy

Page

Problem

• Check if the power plug is surely connected to the AC out-

let.

–

Power is not turned on.

• Check if the power cord is surely inserted into the power

socket of the unit.

–

The HDD safety mode screen

appears after turning on the

power.

• The HDD safety mode is set to ON.

Set the HDD safety mode to OFF.

Refer to pp. xx

• Check if the lens covers of the cameras have been

removed.

–

• Check if the power is supplied to cameras and connected

devices.

No camera image is displayed

on MON 1, MON 2, and the

VGA monitor

• Check if the cable connections are correct.

• Check the brightness and contrast settings of monitors.

Refer to pp. xxx

and xxx.

• Check the level settings of users logging in. Can the users

display camera images on monitors?

The log-in menu does not

appear even if you press the

button of the unit.

• Check if no user has logged in with the system controller.

–

The camera image is dim.

• Check if dust may not be sticking on the camera lens.

Refer to pp. xxx

and xxx.

• Check the level settings of users logging in. Can the users

display SETUP MENU on monitors?

Cannot open SETUP MENU.

149

Check item/Remedy

Page

Problem

• Check if the HDD has an additional disk space.

Refer to p. xxx.

• Check if the alarm operation is set to ON.

• Check the schedule settings.

Cannot start recording.

• Check the recording priority settings.

• This unit may neither record nor display setup menus

because the matrix switcher system employs non-inter-

lace signals.

Cannot record the SETUP

MENU of a matrix switcher

–

Refer to p. xxx.

• Check if images have been recorded in the HDD.

• Check the level settings of users logging in. Can the users

record images?

Refer to pp. xxx

and xxx.

Cannot playback images.

• Check the level settings of users logging in. Can the users

display camera images on monitors?

Refer to pp. xxx

and xxx.

• Check the connection of camera you are going to control.

Coaxial communication control is available for cameras

connected to VIDEO IN 1 to 8.

–

• Check if the camera you are going to control is a combina-

tion camera.

–

Refer to p. xxx.

Cannot control cameras.

• Check the camera control settings.

Refer to pp. xxx

and xxx.

• Check the level settings of users logging in. Can the users

control cameras?

• Check the BUSY indicator. When the indicator is lighting,

a higher-priority user is controlling cameras. You cannot

control cameras until the indicator goes out.

Refer to pp. xx

and xx.

150

Check item/Remedy

Page

Problem

• Check if alarm input signals are properly input to the

ALARM IN or ALARM/CONTROL at the rear panel.

–

Alarm operations are not acti-

vated.

–

• Check the settings of ALARM IN.

Refer to p. xxx.

• Check if the operation mode is set to ALM (alarm mode).

• Check the camera connections.

–

"VIDEO LOSS" appears on the

monitor.

• If the camera connections are proper, refer to the dealer.

Cable wires may be snapped or the unit may have trou-

ble.

• Check if the ambient operating temperature is between

+5°C and +45 °C.

• When the inside of unit exceeds 45 °C, "THERMAL" may

appear even within the ambient temperature mentioned

above.

"THERMAL" appears on the

monitor.

Refer to p. xxx.

• If "THERMAL" frequently appear on monitors, refer to the

dealer. The unit may have trouble.

• Check if the built-in backup battery has been charged

enough. If not so, supply power to the unit for 48 hours or

more to recharge the battery.

Refer to p. xxx.

The clock does not keep cor-

rect time.

• Check if the built-in backup battery has been worn out.

The battery can endure for approx. 5 years. (The

endurance may differ depending on conditions.)

• Check if HDDs were added or removed. If so, DISK CON-

FIG MENU will be displayed automatically.

Refer to p. xxx.

When you power on the unit,

DISK CONFIG MENU will be

displayed.

• If DISK CONFIG MENU is displayed even though no

HDDs were added or removed, Refer to the dealer. The

HDD may have trouble.

–

151

Check item/Remedy

Page

Problem

• Check if the termination is set to STOP.

Refer to p. xxx.

The additional disk space of

HDD is not displayed.

–

• Check if there is a partition in the HDD.

• Check if the termination is set to STOP.

Refer to p. xxx.

The available disk space of

HDD is not displayed on the

right bar.

• Check if there is a partition in the HDD.

–

• Check the network settings of the unit and PC.

–

Cannot establish the connec-

tion via the network.

• Check the host registration setting. When host authentica-

tion is set to ON, you cannot establish the connection

from computers other than the PC registered as the host.

Refer to p. xxx.

Response or Image update

takes time.

–

• Check if the network is crowded.

Inspect the power cord, power plug and connectors periodically.

The power cord insulation is

damaged.

• The power cord, plug and connectors are worn out. This may result in electric

shock or a fire. Unplug the power plug from the AC outlet immediately, and

refer to qualified service personnel.

The power cord, plug and con-

nectors get hot during the use.

The power cord gets heat when

bent or stretched.

152

SPECIFICATION

General

Power source:

120 V AC, 50 Hz/60 Hz

85 W

Power consumption

Ambient operating

temperature

+5 °C to +45°C

Ambient operating

humidity

Less than 90 %

Dimensions

420 mm (W) X 88 mm (H) X 350 mm (D) [16-9/16" (W) X 3-7/16" (H) X

13-3/4" (D)] (excluding rubber feet and projections)

Weight

9.5 kg (21 lbs.)

Input/Output

Video

Video input connectors

1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, with auto termination loop-thru, vertical timing pulse mul-

tiplexed, x8 (1 to 8 CH) (BNC)

1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, with auto-termination loop-thru,

x8 (9 to 16 CH) (BNC)

Cascade input connector 1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω (BNC)

Video output connectors

1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, active loop-thru output, x8 (1 to 8 CH) (BNC)*¹

1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, active loop-thru output, x8 (9 to 16 CH) (BNC)

Monitor output connectors 1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, x2 (BNC)

Monitor output connector RGB output, x1 (15-pin D-sub)

(VGA)

S-video output connector Y = 1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, C-0.286 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, x1 (S-video output connec-

tor)

Video output connector

(front panel)

1 V [P-P] / 75 Ω, x1 (RCA pin)

Audio

Audio input connectors

Audio output connectors

Expansion connector

Copy connectors

–10 dB, 10 KΩ, x4 (RCA pin)

–10 dB, 600 Ω, unbalanced, x2 (RCA pin)

Others

High-speed serial interface, 480 Mbps (theoretical value), x1

High-speed serial interface, 480 Mbps (theoretical value), x2

Control connectors

Emergency recording input*², additional space warning output*³(for

devices connected to copy connectors), HDD trouble output*³, camera

trouble output*³, trouble output*³, electricity failure recovery completion

output*⁴, time adjust input/output*⁵, sequence switching input/output*⁵,

electricity failure detection input*², external recording mode switching*²

(25-pin D-sub) , +5 V output *⁷

Alarm port

1 to 8 CH alarm input*⁶, 1 to 16 CH alarm input*², 1 to 16 alarm output*³,

alarm recovery input*², alarm suspension input*⁵(25-pin D-sub)

RS-485 ports

DATA ports

SERIAL port

Ethernet port

RS-485 (full duplex/half duplex*⁸), x2 (RJ-11)

RS-485, x2 (RJ-11)

RS-232C, x1 (9-pin D-sub)

10 Base-T/100 Base-Tx (RJ-45)

When power is not supplied, video output signal was not sent from the unit even if video input signal is supplied.

Non-voltage N.O. Contact, 100 mA, +5 V pull-up

Open collector output, maximum under conditions of 24 V DC and 100 mA or less

High (+12 V, 6.3 mA)

30 KΩ, 5 V pull-up, –100 mA, N.O. Contact

5 V pull-up, –100 mA, Non-voltage N.O. Contact input

240 mA at maximum

Changeable with the mode switch

153

PANASONIC CANADA INC.

5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga,

Panasonic Digital Communications & Security Company

Unit of Matsushita Electric Corporation of America

Ontario, L4W 2T3 Canada (905)624-5010

PANASONIC SALES COMPANY

DIVISION OF MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC OF PUERTO RICO INC.

San Gabriel Industrial Park 65th Infantry Ave. KM. 9.5 Carolina,

P.R. 00985 (809)750-4300

Security Systems Group

www.panasonic.com/cctv

Executive Office: One Panasonic Way 3E-7, Secaucus, New Jersey 07094

Zone Office

Eastern: One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, NJ 07094 (201) 348-7303

Central: 1707 N.Randal Road, Elgin, IL 60123 (847) 468-5205

Western: 6550 Katella Ave., Cypress, CA 90630 (714) 373-7840

N0903-0

3TR001202AAA

Printed in Japan

JVC DT E21L4 User Manual
Keytec KTT 019CAF User Manual
Magnetek Computer Hardware Quattro DC Elevator Drive User Manual
NEC MultiSync LCD205WNXM User Manual
Nvidia N61S User Manual
Panasonic Cordless Telephone KX TG210 B User Manual
Philips 20GX1850 User Manual
Philips 25TS56C User Manual
Philips Brilliance 170P5EG User Manual
Philips KX TG2257 User Manual